trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@598 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

5 files changed, 11108 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/ccycle.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/ccycle.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1603014bdae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/ccycle.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+\def\batchfile{ccycle.ins}

+\input docstrip.tex

+\preamble

+

+This is a generated file.

+

+Copyright 1996,1998 by Shinsaku Fujita

+

+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.

+=======================================

+

+Version 1.01 Released on August 16, 1996 

+Version 1.02 Released on October 31, 1996 

+Version 2.00 Released on December 25, 1998

+

+Copyright (C) 1996,1998 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.

+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 

+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 

+is an input directory for TeX. 

+

+Copying of this file is authorized only if either

+

+ (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name and 

+     directory name 

+ (2) if you do make changes, 

+     (a) you name it something other than the names included in the 

+         ``xymtex'' directory and 

+     (b) you acknowledge the original name. 

+ This restriction ensures that all standard styles are identical.

+

+=======================================

+

+This file contains several codes modified from latex.tex (LaTeX2.09) 

+and from latex.ltx (a LaTeX2e), the reused parts of which are subject to 

+Copyright 1994 the LaTeX3 project and the individual authors (For further 

+copyright information see the file legal.txt of the LaTeX2e standard 

+distribution, and any other copyright indicated in this file.)

+

+\endpreamble

+

+\keepsilent

+

+\generateFile{ccycle.drv}{t}{%

+  \from{ccycle.dtx}{driver}}

+

+\generateFile{ccycle.sty}{t}{%

+  \from{ccycle.dtx}{ccycle}}

+

+\endinput

+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/chemist.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/chemist.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9d37ff1334c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/chemist.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,2359 @@
+% \iffalse 
+%
+% chemist.dtx
+% 
+% Copyright (C) 1996, 1999, 2000 by Shinsaku Fujita  All rights reserved.
+%
+% This file is part of the ChemSci system
+% ========================================
+%
+% This style file is created for submitting a manuscript to 
+% scientific journals. This style file is to be contained in the 
+% ``chemist'' directory which is an input directory for TeX. 
+%
+% For using this file, see 
+%  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%  Tokyo Kagaku Dojin, Tokyo (1993), Chapter 16. 
+%
+% Copying of this file is authorized only if either
+%
+% (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name and 
+%     directory name 
+% (2) if you do make changes, 
+%     (a) you name it something other than the names included in the 
+%         ``chemist'' directory and 
+%     (b) you acknowledge the original name. 
+% This restriction ensures that all standard styles are identical.
+%
+%=======================================
+%
+% This file is a modification of latex.tex (LaTeX2.09) and of latex.ltx
+% (LaTeX2e), the reused parts of which is subject to 
+% Copyright 1994 the LaTeX3 project and the individual authors (For further 
+% copyright information see the file legal.txt of the LaTeX2e standard 
+% distribution, and any other copyright indicated in this file.)
+%
+%=======================================
+%
+% This file is a successor to:
+%
+% *********************************************************************
+% * chemist.sty <Sept 29 1991> by Shinsaku Fujita                     *
+% *  counters and related matters for compounds.                      *
+% *  ffboxit: November 2 1991 by S. Fujita                            *
+% *  bslskipchange: November 6 1991 by S. Fujita (deleted)            *
+% *  chapinitial: 1991 November 7 by S. Fujita                        *
+% *  variable arrows: 1992 May 24 by S. Fujita                        *
+% *  reaction and scheme arrows (revised): 1992 May 24  by S. Fujita  *
+% *  changespace <=== bslskipchange: Dec 31 1992 by S. Fujita         *
+% *  (g)rshfboxit and (g)lshfboxit: January 3, 1993 by S. Fujita      *
+% *********************************************************************
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Released on January 3, 1993 
+% Copyright (C) 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.
+% This style file is created for making manuscripts of chemical fields.  
+% This option style file is to be contained in the ``chemist'' directory 
+% which is an input directory for TeX. 
+%
+% For using this file, see 
+%    Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 
+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dojin, Tokyo (1993), Chapters 7, 9, 12 and 18. 
+% このスタイル・ファイルの使用法は、
+%   藤田 眞作 著　『化学者・生化学者のためのLaTeX』
+%   東京化学同人、東京 (1993)、第7, 9, 12, 18章をご覧下さい。
+%
+% Copying of this file is authorized only if either
+% (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name and 
+%     directory name 
+% (2) if you do make changes, 
+%     (a) you name it something other than the names included in the 
+%         ``chemist'' directory and 
+%     (b) you acknowledge the original name. 
+% This restriction ensures that all standard styles are identical.
+%  %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemist}
+% \def\versi@ndate{January 03, 1993}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.00}
+%  %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% Version 1.01 
+%  --- added the end commands of the \verbatim environment and the 
+%      \verb command contained in LaTeX 2.09
+%  --- \LaTeX, \BibTeX logos etc improved
+% \typeout{verbatim for LaTeX2.09 (and LaTeX2e) in chemist.sty}
+% \typeout{logos for LaTeX2.09 (and LaTeX2e) in chemist.sty}
+% \def\versi@ndate{April 20, 1996}
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemist}
+% \def\versi@ndate{April 20, 1996}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.01}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemist} \def\journalID{chemist}
+% \def\versi@ndate{June 15, 1996}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.01a}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% \typeout{Package `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>\space 
+% [\copyrighth@lder]}
+% \typeout{chemist.sty ver1.01a (for LaTeX2e) 1996/06/15[SF]}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \def\j@urnalname{chemist} \def\journalID{chemist}
+% \def\versi@ndate{March 16, 1999}
+% \def\versi@nno{ver2.00}
+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% 
+% \fi
+% \CheckSum{3588}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%
+%% `chemist.dtx' ver1.01a (for LaTeX2e) 1996/06/15 
+%%  by Shinsaku Fujita
+%%
+%
+% \section{Initial declaration}
+%
+% \changes{v1.01a}{1996/06/15}{For LaTeX2e: dtx file}
+% \changes{v1.01a}{1996/07/16}{Comment out for use LaTeX2.09}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1999/03/16}{For XyMTeX 2.00 Enhanced Version}
+% \changes{v2.00a}{2000/11/03}{Bug fix}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    <chemist>\ProvidesFile{chemist.sty}
+%<driver>\ProvidesFile{chemist.drv}
+%<driver>         [2000/11/03 v2.00a
+%    <chemist>     ChemSci package ]
+%<driver>     ChemSci package driver (English)
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \section{Driver file for this dtx file}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1996/06/15}{first draft}
+% \changes{v2.00a}{2000/11/05}{bug fix}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+ ]
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{chemist.drv}
+\title{Chemist Package \space\fileversion}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 
+Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology \\
+Kyoto Institute of Technology 
+%% Ashigara Research Laboratories \\
+%% Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+\DocInput{chemist.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{{\sc docstrip} options}
+%
+% This dtx file provides the {\sffamily chemist} package 
+% by docstrip processing. 
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+%  \hline
+%   argument & package name \\
+%  \hline
+%   chemist   & chemist.sty \\
+%   driver  & a documentation driver file \\
+%  \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+% 
+% \section{Version information}
+%
+% The old process for typing out version information remains active. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<chemist>\def\j@urnalname{chemist} \def\journalID{chemist}
+\def\versi@ndate{November 3, 2000}
+\def\versi@nno{ver2.00a}
+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita
+%<*chemist>
+\typeout{Package `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>\space 
+[\copyrighth@lder]}
+\typeout{chemist.sty ver2.00a (for LaTeX2e) 2000/11/03[SF]}
+%</chemist>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Cross-references of compounds}
+%
+% The \textsf{compd} counter is introduced for numbering 
+% chemical compounds. 
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\thecompd}
+%  \begin{macro}{\compd}
+%  \begin{macro}{\nocompd}
+% 
+% The |\thecompd| command prints compound numbering without 
+% advancing the the \textsf{compd} counter. 
+% The |\compd| command prints compound numbering and advances 
+% the \textsf{compd} counter by one, while 
+% the |\nocompd| advances the \textsf{compd} counter by one 
+% without printing. 
+% \changes{v1.01a}{1996/06/22}{the unskip command was deleted.}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*chemist>
+% *******************
+% * compound label  *
+% *   1991 sept 29  *
+% *******************
+% After Chapter 9 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{\newcounter{compd}}{\newcounter{compd}[chapter]}
+\def\thecompd{\arabic{compd}} 
+%\def\compd{\refstepcounter{compd}\unskip{\large\bf \thecompd}}
+\def\compd{\leavevmode\refstepcounter{compd}{\large\bf \thecompd}}
+\def\nocompd{\refstepcounter{compd}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\compdlabel}
+%  \begin{macro}{\nocompdlabel}
+%  \begin{macro}{\cref}
+%
+% The cross-reference of compound numbers are conducted by using 
+% |\label| and |\ref| commands. Alternative commands are also available 
+% as follows.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\compdlabel#1{\compd \label{#1}}
+\def\nocompdlabel#1{\nocompd \label{#1}}
+\@ifundefined{bf}{\def\bf{\normalfont\bfseries}}{}
+\def\cref#1{{\bf \ref{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\compdfbox}
+%  \begin{macro}{\compdmbox}
+%  \begin{macro}{\lbcompdpbox}
+%
+% For takeing a space for compound output, we can use |\compdfbox| 
+% and like. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\compdfbox#1#2#3{\framebox[#1]{\rule[-0.3mm]{0pt}{#2} #3 }}
+\def\compdmbox#1#2#3{\makebox[#1]{\rule[-0.3mm]{0pt}{#2} #3 }}
+\def\lbcompdpbox#1#2#3{\parbox{#2}{\vskip 2em 
+  \parbox{#2}{#3 \par \centering{\compdlabel{#1}}\vskip 2em }}} 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+% The \textsf{deriv} counter is introduced for numbering 
+% derivatives of a compound. 
+% \changes{v1.01a}{1996/06/22}{the unskip command was deleted.}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1999/03/17}{derivnum added}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\thederiv}
+%  \begin{macro}{\deriv}
+%  \begin{macro}{\noderiv}
+%  \begin{macro}{\derivnum}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ********************
+% * deriv label      *
+% *   1991 oct  01   *
+% ********************
+% After Chapter 9 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\newcounter{deriv}[compd]
+\def\thederiv {\thecompd\alph{deriv}}
+%\def\deriv{\refstepcounter{deriv}\unskip{\large\bf \thederiv}}
+\def\deriv{\leavevmode\refstepcounter{deriv}{\large\bf \thederiv}}
+\def\noderiv{\refstepcounter{deriv}}
+\def\derivnum{%
+\leavevmode\refstepcounter{deriv}{\large\bf \alph{deriv}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\derivlabel}
+%  \begin{macro}{\noderivlabel}
+%
+% The cross-reference of derivative numbers are conducted by using 
+% |\label| and |\ref| commands.  
+% Alternative commands are also available as follows.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\derivlabel#1{\deriv \label{#1}}
+\def\noderivlabel#1{\noderiv \label{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\derivfbox}
+%  \begin{macro}{\derivmbox}
+%  \begin{macro}{\lbderivpbox}
+%
+% For takeing a space for placing a derivative, we can use |\compdfbox| 
+% and like. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\derivfbox#1#2#3{\framebox[#1]{\rule[-0.3mm]{0pt}{#2} #3 }}
+\def\derivmbox#1#2#3{\makebox[#1]{\rule[-0.3mm]{0pt}{#2} #3 }}
+\def\lbderivpbox#1#2#3{\parbox{#2}{\vskip 2em 
+  \parbox{#2}{#3 \par \centering{\derivlabel{#1}}\vskip 2em }}} 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\deriva}
+%  \begin{macro}{\noderiva}
+%  \begin{macro}{\derivalabel}
+%  \begin{macro}{\noderivalabel}
+%
+% The \textsf{deriv} counter is also advanced by |\deriva| command and like. 
+% This command produced the net output of the \textsf{deriv} counter. 
+% \changes{v1.01a}{1996/06/22}{the unskip command was deleted.}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ********************
+% * deriva label     *
+% *   1991 oct  05   *
+% ********************
+% After Chapter 9 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+%\def\deriva{\refstepcounter{deriv}\unskip{\large\bf \alph{deriv}}}
+\def\deriva{\leavevmode\refstepcounter{deriv}{\large\bf \alph{deriv}}}
+\def\noderiva{\refstepcounter{deriv}}
+\def\derivalabel#1{\deriva \label{#1}}
+\def\noderivalabel#1{\noderiva \label{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Boxes for placing compounds}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\cdonecell}
+%  \begin{macro}{\cdtwocell}
+%
+% These boxes with a given width are used for printing chemical compounds. 
+% A box provided by |\cdonecell| is used for accomodating a compound. 
+% A box provided by |\cdtwocell| is devied into two vertical cells 
+% where the one is to place a compound and the other to place 
+% the compound number. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ********************
+% * cdonecell label  *
+% *   1991 oct  04   *
+% ********************
+% After Chapter 9 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\def\cdonecell#1#2#3{\raisebox{#1}{\parbox{#2}{\centering{#3}}}}
+% #1 ue, #2 haba, #3 honbun 
+\def\cdtwocell#1#2#3#4{\raisebox{#1}{
+ \parbox{#2}{\centering{#3} \par \vskip 3pt \centering{#4}  }}}
+% #1 ue, #2 haba, #3 ue honbun, #4 shita label 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Arrows}
+%
+% \subsection{Arrows with variable length}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\leftrightarrowfill}
+%  \begin{macro}{\Leftarrowfill}
+%  \begin{macro}{\Rightarrowfill}
+%  \begin{macro}{\Leftrightarrowfill}
+%
+% LaTeX{} are possessed of |\leftarrowfill| and |\rightarrowfill| for 
+% drawing arrows with variable length.  The {\sffamily chemist} 
+% package defines other arrows with variable length for drawing 
+% chemical equations or schemes. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *******************
+% * variable arrows * 1992 May 24 S. Fujita
+% *******************
+% After Chapter 9 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\def\leftrightarrowfill{$\m@th \mathord\leftarrow \mkern-6mu 
+ \cleaders\hbox{$\mkern-2mu \mathord- \mkern-2mu$}\hfill 
+ \mkern-6mu \mathord\rightarrow$}
+\def\Leftarrowfill{$\m@th \mathord\Leftarrow \mkern-6mu 
+ \cleaders\hbox{$\mkern-2mu \mathord= \mkern-2mu$}\hfill 
+ \mkern-6mu \mathord=$}
+\def\Rightarrowfill{$\m@th \mathord= \mkern-6mu 
+ \cleaders\hbox{$\mkern-2mu \mathord= \mkern-2mu$}\hfill 
+ \mkern-6mu \mathord\Rightarrow$}
+\def\Leftrightarrowfill{$\m@th \mathord\Leftarrow \mkern-6mu 
+ \cleaders\hbox{$\mkern-2mu \mathord= \mkern-2mu$}\hfill 
+ \mkern-6mu \mathord\Rightarrow$}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Reaction arrows with variable length}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\reactrarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\reactlarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\reactlrarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\reacteqarrow}
+%
+% The {\sffamily chemist} package defines arrows with variable length 
+% for drawing chemical equations, where additional information 
+% can be written on the upper and/or downward sides of each arrow.  
+% \changes{v2.00}{1999/02/02}{Vertical spacing changed}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1999/03/16}{Horizontal shift}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ******************* 1991 Oct 4 S. Fujita
+% * reaction arrows * Revised 1992 May 24 S.Fujita%1999/02/02 SF
+% *******************
+% After Chapter 9 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+% #1 yoko #2 ue, #3 haba, #4 ya no ue, #5 ya no shita 
+% 
+\def\reactrarrow{\@ifnextchar[{\react@rarrow}{\react@rarrow[0pt]}}
+\def\react@rarrow[#1]#2#3#4#5{\hskip#1\raisebox{#2}{%
+  \parbox{#3}{\centering
+    \baselineskip=.8\normalbaselineskip #4 \par
+    \vskip-0.2\normalbaselineskip
+    \rightarrowfill \par
+    \vskip-0.1\normalbaselineskip #5}}}
+\def\reactlarrow{\@ifnextchar[{\react@larrow}{\react@larrow[0pt]}}
+\def\react@larrow[#1]#2#3#4#5{\hskip#1\raisebox{#2}{%
+    \parbox{#3}{\centering
+    \baselineskip=.8\normalbaselineskip #4 \par
+    \vskip-0.2\normalbaselineskip
+     \leftarrowfill \par
+    \vskip-0.1\normalbaselineskip #5}}}
+\def\reactlrarrow{\@ifnextchar[{\react@lrarrow}{\react@lrarrow[0pt]}}
+\def\react@lrarrow[#1]#2#3#4#5{\hskip#1\raisebox{#2}{%
+    \parbox{#3}{\centering
+    \baselineskip=.8\normalbaselineskip
+    #4 \par
+    \vskip-0.2\normalbaselineskip
+    \centering{\leftrightarrowfill} \par
+    \vskip-0.1\normalbaselineskip #5}}}
+\def\reacteqarrow{\@ifnextchar[{\react@eqarrow}{\react@eqarrow[0pt]}}
+\def\react@eqarrow[#1]#2#3#4#5{\hskip#1\raisebox{#2}{%
+    \parbox{#3}{\centering
+    \baselineskip=.8\normalbaselineskip
+    #4 \par
+    \vskip-0.2\normalbaselineskip
+    \rightarrowfill \par \vskip-0.55\normalbaselineskip%
+    \leftarrowfill \par
+    \vskip-0.1\normalbaselineskip #5}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\k@nz@n}
+% The |\k@nz@n| command is used for changing a dimension to a 
+% parameter for the \LaTeX{} picture environment. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\k@nz@n#1{\@tempdima=#1\relax
+\@tempcnta=\@tempdima \@tempcntb=\unitlength
+\divide\@tempcnta by \@tempcntb
+\edef\kanzanchi{\the\@tempcnta}%
+\divide\@tempcnta by2\relax
+\edef\kanzanhalf{\the\@tempcnta}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\reactdarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\reactuarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\reactveqarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\reactduarrow}
+% Vertical reaction arrows has been added. 
+% \changes{v2.00}{1999/02/02}{New commands}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\reactdarrow{\@ifnextchar[{\react@darrow}{\react@darrow[0pt]}}
+\def\react@darrow[#1]#2#3#4#5{\hskip#1\raisebox{#2}{\k@nz@n{#3}%
+\def\arraystretch{0.8}%
+\begin{tabular}{l}#4\end{tabular}%
+{\tabcolsep=0pt
+\begin{tabular}{c}\begin{picture}(0,\kanzanchi)(0,0)
+\put(0,\kanzanchi){\vector(0,-1){\kanzanchi}}
+\end{picture}\end{tabular}}%
+\begin{tabular}{l}#5\end{tabular}}}
+%
+\def\reactuarrow{\@ifnextchar[{\react@uarrow}{\react@uarrow[0pt]}}
+\def\react@uarrow[#1]#2#3#4#5{\hskip#1\raisebox{#2}{\k@nz@n{#3}%
+\def\arraystretch{0.8}%
+\begin{tabular}{l}#4\end{tabular}%
+{\tabcolsep=0pt
+\begin{tabular}{c}\begin{picture}(0,\kanzanchi)(0,0)
+\put(0,0){\vector(0,1){\kanzanchi}}
+\end{picture}\end{tabular}}%
+\begin{tabular}{l}#5\end{tabular}}}
+%
+\def\reactveqarrow{\@ifnextchar[%]
+{\react@veqarrow}{\react@veqarrow[0pt]}}
+\def\react@veqarrow[#1]#2#3#4#5{\hskip#1\raisebox{#2}{\k@nz@n{#3}%
+\def\arraystretch{0.8}%
+\begin{tabular}{l}#4\end{tabular}%
+{\tabcolsep=0pt
+\begin{tabular}{c}\begin{picture}(40,\kanzanchi)(0,0)
+\put(40,0){\vector(0,1){\kanzanchi}}
+\put(0,\kanzanchi){\vector(0,-1){\kanzanchi}}
+\end{picture}\end{tabular}}%
+\begin{tabular}{l}#5\end{tabular}}}
+%
+\def\reactduarrow{\@ifnextchar[{\react@duarrow}{\react@duarrow[0pt]}}
+\def\react@duarrow[#1]#2#3#4#5{\hskip#1\raisebox{#2}{\k@nz@n{#3}%
+\def\arraystretch{0.8}%
+\begin{tabular}{l}#4\end{tabular}%
+{\tabcolsep=0pt
+\begin{tabular}{c}\begin{picture}(0,\kanzanchi)(0,0)
+\put(0,\kanzanhalf){\vector(0,1){\kanzanhalf}}
+\put(0,\kanzanhalf){\vector(0,-1){\kanzanhalf}}
+\end{picture}\end{tabular}}%
+\begin{tabular}{l}#5\end{tabular}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\reactswarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\reactsearrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\reactnwrarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\reactnearrow}
+% Further reaction arrows have been added. 
+% \changes{v2.00}{1999/02/02}{New commands}
+% \changes{v2.00}{2000/06/14}{Bug Fix: exchanged sw -- se and nw --ne}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\reactsearrow{\@ifnextchar[{\react@searrow}{\react@searrow[0pt]}}
+\def\react@searrow[#1]#2#3#4#5{\hskip#1\raisebox{#2}{\k@nz@n{#3}%
+\def\arraystretch{0.8}%
+\begin{picture}(\kanzanchi,\kanzanchi)(0,0)
+\put(0,\kanzanchi){\vector(1,-1){\kanzanchi}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\hbox to0pt{%
+\begin{tabular}[b]{l}#4\end{tabular}\hss}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\lower2ex\hbox to0pt{\hss
+\begin{tabular}[t]{r}#5\end{tabular}}}
+\end{picture}}}
+%
+\def\reactnwarrow{\@ifnextchar[{\react@nwarrow}{\react@nwarrow[0pt]}}
+\def\react@nwarrow[#1]#2#3#4#5{\hskip#1\raisebox{#2}{\k@nz@n{#3}%
+\def\arraystretch{0.8}%
+\begin{picture}(\kanzanchi,\kanzanchi)(0,0)
+\put(\kanzanchi,0){\vector(-1,1){\kanzanchi}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\hbox to0pt{%
+\begin{tabular}[b]{l}#4\end{tabular}\hss}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\lower2ex\hbox to0pt{\hss
+\begin{tabular}[t]{r}#5\end{tabular}}}
+\end{picture}}}
+%
+\def\reactnearrow{\@ifnextchar[{\react@nearrow}{\react@nearrow[0pt]}}
+\def\react@nearrow[#1]#2#3#4#5{\hskip#1\raisebox{#2}{\k@nz@n{#3}%
+\def\arraystretch{0.8}%
+\begin{picture}(\kanzanchi,\kanzanchi)(0,0)
+\put(0,0){\vector(1,1){\kanzanchi}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\lower2ex\hbox to0pt{%
+\begin{tabular}[t]{l}#5\end{tabular}\hss}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\hbox to0pt{\hss
+\begin{tabular}[b]{r}#4\end{tabular}}}
+\end{picture}}}
+%
+\def\reactswarrow{\@ifnextchar[{\react@swarrow}{\react@swarrow[0pt]}}
+\def\react@swarrow[#1]#2#3#4#5{\hskip#1\raisebox{#2}{\k@nz@n{#3}%
+\def\arraystretch{0.8}%
+\begin{picture}(\kanzanchi,\kanzanchi)(0,0)
+\put(\kanzanchi,\kanzanchi){\vector(-1,-1){\kanzanchi}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\lower2ex\hbox to0pt{%
+\begin{tabular}[t]{l}#5\end{tabular}\hss}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\hbox to0pt{\hss
+\begin{tabular}[b]{r}#4\end{tabular}}}
+\end{picture}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\reactdeqarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\reactueqarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\reactdlrarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\reactulrarrow}
+% Further reaction arrows have been added. 
+% \changes{v2.00}{1999/02/02}{New commands}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\reactdeqarrow{\@ifnextchar[%]
+{\react@deqarrow}{\react@deqarrow[0pt]}}
+\def\react@deqarrow[#1]#2#3#4#5{\hskip#1\raisebox{#2}{\k@nz@n{#3}%
+\def\arraystretch{0.8}%
+\begin{picture}(\kanzanchi,\kanzanchi)(0,0)
+\put(0,\kanzanchi){\put(15,15){\vector(1,-1){\kanzanchi}}}
+\put(\kanzanchi,0){\put(-15,-15){\vector(-1,1){\kanzanchi}}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\raise1ex\hbox to0pt{%
+\begin{tabular}[b]{l}#4\end{tabular}\hss}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\lower2ex\hbox to0pt{\hss
+\begin{tabular}[t]{r}#5\end{tabular}}}
+\end{picture}}}
+\def\reactueqarrow{\@ifnextchar[%]
+{\react@ueqarrow}{\react@ueqarrow[0pt]}}
+\def\react@ueqarrow[#1]#2#3#4#5{\hskip#1\raisebox{#2}{\k@nz@n{#3}%
+\def\arraystretch{0.8}%
+\begin{picture}(\kanzanchi,\kanzanchi)(0,0)
+\put(0,0){\put(-15,15){\vector(1,1){\kanzanchi}}}
+\put(\kanzanchi,\kanzanchi){\put(15,-15){\vector(-1,-1){\kanzanchi}}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\lower2ex\hbox to0pt{%
+\begin{tabular}[t]{l}#5\end{tabular}\hss}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\raise1ex\hbox to0pt{\hss
+\begin{tabular}[b]{r}#4\end{tabular}}}
+\end{picture}}}
+\def\reactulrarrow{\@ifnextchar[%]
+{\react@ulrarrow}{\react@ulrarrow[0pt]}}
+\def\react@ulrarrow[#1]#2#3#4#5{\hskip#1\raisebox{#2}{\k@nz@n{#3}%
+\def\arraystretch{0.8}%
+\begin{picture}(\kanzanchi,\kanzanchi)(0,0)
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\vector(1,1){\kanzanhalf}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\vector(-1,-1){\kanzanhalf}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\lower2ex\hbox to0pt{%
+\begin{tabular}[t]{l}#5\end{tabular}\hss}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\raise1ex\hbox to0pt{\hss
+\begin{tabular}[b]{r}#4\end{tabular}}}
+\end{picture}}}
+\def\reactdlrarrow{\@ifnextchar[%]
+{\react@dlrarrow}{\react@dlrarrow[0pt]}}
+\def\react@dlrarrow[#1]#2#3#4#5{\hskip#1\raisebox{#2}{\k@nz@n{#3}%
+\def\arraystretch{0.8}%
+\begin{picture}(\kanzanchi,\kanzanchi)(0,0)
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\vector(-1,1){\kanzanhalf}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\vector(1,-1){\kanzanhalf}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\hbox to0pt{%
+\begin{tabular}[b]{l}#4\end{tabular}\hss}}
+\put(\kanzanhalf,\kanzanhalf){\lower2ex\hbox to0pt{\hss
+\begin{tabular}[t]{r}#5\end{tabular}}}
+\end{picture}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\schemelarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\schemerarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\schemelrarrow}
+%
+% The {\sffamily chemist} package defines double-line arrows with variable 
+% length for drawing reaction schemes, where additional information 
+% can be written on the upper and/or downward sides of each arrow.  
+% \changes{v2.00}{1999/02/02}{Vertical spacing changed}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ********************************
+% * scheme arrows                *
+% * 1991 OCT 4 S. Fujita         *
+% * Revised 1992 May 24 S.Fujita * 1999/02/02 by S. Fujita
+% ********************************
+% After Chapter 9 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\def\schemelarrow#1#2#3#4{\raisebox{#1}{%
+    \parbox{#2}{\centering 
+    \baselineskip=.8\normalbaselineskip #3 \par
+    \vskip-0.2\normalbaselineskip
+    \centering{\Leftarrowfill} \par
+    \vskip-0.1\normalbaselineskip #4}}}
+\def\schemerarrow#1#2#3#4{\raisebox{#1}{%
+    \parbox{#2}{\centering
+    \baselineskip=.8\normalbaselineskip #3 \par
+    \vskip-0.2\normalbaselineskip
+    \centering{\Rightarrowfill} \par
+    \vskip-0.1\normalbaselineskip #4}}}
+\def\schemelrarrow#1#2#3#4{\raisebox{#1}{%
+    \parbox{#2}{\centering
+    \baselineskip=.8\normalbaselineskip #3 \par
+    \vskip-0.2\normalbaselineskip
+    \centering{\Leftrightarrowfill} \par
+    \vskip-0.1\normalbaselineskip #4}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\changespace}
+%
+% The |\changespace| command is used to change a vertical space 
+% between lines. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *************************
+% * Changing line spacing *
+% *************************
+% After Chapter 3 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\def\changespace#1{\def\baselinestretch{#1} \@normalsize}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    %%%%%%%%%%1991 November 6%%%\bslskipchange%%%%%%%%%%
+% \newenvironment{bslskipchange}[1]%
+% {\par\begingroup\global\baselineskip= #1\normalbaselineskip}%
+% {\endgroup\par\global\baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip%
+%  \global\@ignoretrue}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Captions}
+% \subsection{Changing caption types within a float}
+% \changes{v1.00}{1993/06/17}{by S. Fujita}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\tbcaption}
+%  \begin{macro}{\fgcaption}
+%  \begin{macro}{\smcaption}
+%
+% These commands enable us to place two or more floats of 
+% different kinds in a single floating body.  
+%
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{lp{5cm}}
+%   \verb/\tbcaption[TCAP]{CAP}/ &
+%      makes a table caption in a float other than ``table'' or 
+%      after using \verb/\fgcaption/ or \verb/\smcaption/ command. \\
+%   \verb/\fgcaption[TCAP]{CAP}/ &
+%      makes a figure caption in a float other than ``figure'' or 
+%      after using \verb/\tbcaption/ or \verb/\smcaption/ command. \\
+%   \verb/\smcaption[TCAP]{CAP}/ & 
+%      makes a scheme caption in a float other than ``scheme'' or 
+%      after using \verb/\tbcaption/ or \verb/\fgcaption/ command. \\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+%
+% For exmaple, we have 
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%   \begin{figure}
+%      \caption{aaa}   % 通常のキャプション。
+%      \tbcaption{bbb} % 表のキャプションの強制的に変更。
+%      \fgcaption[ccc]{ddd} %図のキャプションに戻す。
+%   \end{figure}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tbcaption{\def\@captype{table}\caption}
+\def\fgcaption{\def\@captype{figure}\caption}
+\def\smcaption{\def\@captype{scheme}\caption}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\chapinitial}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *****************
+% * miscellaneous *
+% *****************
+%%%%%%%%%%%1991 November 7%%%chapinitial%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\chap@initial#1%
+{\medbreak\begingroup\clubpenalty=10000
+ \def\par{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak} 
+ \noindent\hangindent28pt\hangafter=-2
+\hbox to0pt{\hskip-\hangindent 
+\hbox to28pt{\hss\raise-4pt\hbox{\lower3pt\hbox{\Huge\bf #1}} }
+} \hskip-5pt plus2pt minus2pt}
+\outer\def\chapinitial{\chap@initial}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Redefinition of verbatim}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\yen}
+%
+% The {\sffamily chemist} package uses a customaized defintion of |\yen| for 
+% printing the top symbol of each command sequence. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ************
+% * ￥の定義 *
+% ************
+% % ￥ %%%%%from ascmac.sty%%%%added \leavevmode%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%\def\yen{\leavevmode{\setbox0=\hbox{Y}Y\kern-.97\wd0\vbox{%
+% \hrule\@height.1ex\@width.98\wd0%
+% \kern.33ex\hrule\@height.1ex\@width.98\wd0\kern.45ex}}}
+%
+\def\yen{\leavevmode\hbox{\setbox0=\hbox{Y}%
+\setbox1=\vbox{\hrule height.05\ht0 width.96\wd0%
+\kern.18\ht0\hrule height.05\ht0 width.96\wd0}%
+\setbox1=\hbox to\wd0{\raise.3\ht0\box1\hss}%
+{\ooalign{\hfil\box1\hfil\crcr\box0}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\ifverbswitch}
+%  \begin{macro}{\verb}
+% 
+% The switch |\ifverbswitch| is used for changing |\yen| or 
+% |\backslash| for the top symbol of each control sequence 
+% printed by the |\verb| command. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% **************************
+% * ￥を含んだverbatim環境 *
+% **************************
+% %%%%%%1992 April 30 %%%verbatim%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% % from       奥村晴彦　LaTeX美文書作成入門　1991 技術評論社    %
+% %  omitted: =, by, etc.                                        %
+% %  added: verbswitch                                           %
+% %          \verbswitchtrue===> yen mark                        %
+% %          \verbswitchfalse===> backslash mark                 %
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newif\ifverbswitch \verbswitchtrue
+\let\old@verbatim\@verbatim
+\let\old@xverbatim\@xverbatim
+\let\old@sxverbatim\@sxverbatim
+\begingroup 
+  \catcode`\|=0  \catcode`\\=13 
+  |gdef|verbh@@k{|catcode`|\=13 |let\=|yen}
+|endgroup 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verb{\begingroup \catcode``=13 \@noligs 
+ \tt \let\do\@makeother \dospecials  
+ \ifverbswitch \verbh@@k \fi \@ifstar{\@sverb}{\@verb}} 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{@verbatim}
+%  \begin{environment}{verbatim}
+% 
+% The switch |\ifverbswitch| is also effective 
+% for in a verbtim environment. 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup 
+\catcode`|=0 \catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 
+\catcode`\{=12 \catcode`\}=12 \catcode`\\=13 
+|gdef|@xverbatim#1\end{verbatim}[#1|end[verbatim]]  
+|gdef|@sxverbatim#1\end{verbatim*}[#1|end[verbatim*]]  
+|endgroup 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\verbatimleftmargin \verbatimleftmargin\leftmargini 
+\newdimen\verbatimbaselineskip \verbatimbaselineskip11pt
+\def\verbatimsize{\small}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@verbatim{\trivlist \item[]%
+ \if@minipage \else \vskip\baselineskip%
+ \vskip-\verbatimbaselineskip \vskip\parskip\fi
+ \leftskip\@totalleftmargin 
+ \if@minipage \else \advance\leftskip\verbatimleftmargin \fi
+ \rightskip\z@ \parindent\z@ \parfillskip\@flushglue \parskip\z@
+ \@tempswafalse \def\par{\if@tempswa\hbox{}\fi\@tempswatrue\@@par}
+ \obeylines \verbatimsize \baselineskip\verbatimbaselineskip \tt 
+ \catcode``=13 \@noligs \let\do\@makeother \dospecials} 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbatim{\ifverbswitch \@verbatim \else \old@verbatim \fi
+\frenchspacing \@vobeyspaces 
+\ifverbswitch \verbh@@k \@xverbatim \else \old@xverbatim \fi} 
+\@namedef{verbatim*}{%
+ \ifverbswitch \@verbatim \verbh@@k \@sxverbatim
+ \else \old@verbatim \old@sxverbatim \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%pLaTeX2e%%%%%%%%%%%%%1996/04/20 by S. Fujita%%%%%%
+% pLaTeX2eでは再定義されているので，上のままだとエラーになる
+% LaTeX2.09の定義を補っておく
+\def\@sverb#1{\def\@tempa ##1#1{##1\endgroup}\@tempa}
+\def\@verb{\obeyspaces \frenchspacing \@sverb}
+\def\@sverbtim{\obeyspaces\@verbatim}
+\let\endverbatim=\endtrivlist
+\@namedef{varbatim*}{\@verbatim\@sxverbatim}
+\expandafter\let\csname endverbatim*\endcsname =\endtrivlist
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{environment}
+%  \end{environment}
+%
+%
+% \section{Shadowed Boxes}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\fb@xit}
+%  \begin{macro}{\fboxit}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%
+% <<Base box for boxes>>
+% \fb@xit{LWIDTH}{SPACE}{BWIDTH}{TEXT}
+%     #1 LWIDTH:  line thickness
+%     #2 SPACE:   spacing around the text
+%     #3 BWIDTH:  box width 
+%     #4 TEXT:    text
+% 
+\long\def\fb@xit#1#2#3#4{%
+\setbox4=\vbox{\hsize#3\noindent#4}%
+%\setbox4=\vbox{\hsize#3\noindent\strut#4\strut}%
+\vbox{\hrule\@height#1\hbox{\vrule\@width#1\kern#2\vbox{%
+\kern#2\box4\kern#2}\kern#1\vrule\@width#1}\hrule\@height#1}}
+%\kern#2\box4\kern#2}\vrule\@width#1}\hrule\@height#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%
+% \fboxit{BWIDTH}{TEXT}
+%     #1 BWIDTH:  box width 
+%     #2 TEXT:    text
+%
+\long\def\fboxit#1#2{\fb@xit{\fboxrule}{\fboxsep}{#1}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\leftshfr@me}
+%  \begin{macro}{\leftshframe}
+%  \begin{macro}{\leftshfbox}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% % ************************************************************
+% % * 影のついた箱                                             *
+% % *   January 3, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita                     *
+% % *   Borde ({\em \TeX{} by Example})の記載を参考にして作った*
+% % ************************************************************
+% After Chapter 12 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+% left shadow box 
+%
+%    \leftshfr@me{SWIDTH}{SPACE}{BOXWIDTH}{TEXT}
+%
+%     #1 SWIDTH:    shadow width
+%     #2 SPACE:     spacing around the text
+%     #3 BOXWIDTH:  box width 
+%     #4 TEXT:      text
+%
+%    \leftshframe{BOXWIDTH}{TEXT}
+%
+%     #1 BOXWIDTH:  box width 
+%     #2 TEXT:      text
+%
+%    \leftshfbox{TEXT}
+%
+%     #1 TEXT:      text
+%
+% %%leftshfr@me#1 shadow width, #2 space, #3 boxwidth, #4 text%
+\long\def\leftshfr@me#1#2#3#4{\leavevmode%
+ \vbox{\hbox{\hsize #3\vbox{%
+ \hbox{\vrule\@width #1%
+ \vbox{\kern-#1\fb@xit{%
+ \fboxrule}{#2}{#3}{#4}\kern-\fboxrule}\kern-#1}%
+ \hrule\@height#1}}}\strut\hskip #1\relax} 
+% %leftshframe%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% #1 width, #2 text%%%%%
+\long\def\leftshframe#1#2{%
+ \leftshfr@me{\fboxsep}{\fboxsep}{#1}{#2}}
+% %leftshfbox%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% #1 text%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\long\def\leftshfbox#1{\leavevmode\setbox0=\hbox{\fbox{#1}}%
+ \vbox{\hbox{\vbox{\hbox{\vrule\@width\fboxsep\vbox{%
+       \kern-\fboxsep\box0\kern-\fboxrule}\kern-\fboxsep}%
+ \hrule\@height\fboxsep}}}\hskip\fboxsep\relax} %%%%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\rightshfr@me}
+%  \begin{macro}{\rightshframe}
+%  \begin{macro}{\rightshfbox}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%
+% right shadow box 
+%
+%    \rightshfr@me{SWIDTH}{SPACE}{BOXWIDTH}{TEXT}
+%
+%     #1 SWIDTH:    shadow width
+%     #2 SPACE:     spacing around the text
+%     #3 BOXWIDTH:  box width 
+%     #4 TEXT:      text
+%
+%    \rightshframe{BOXWIDTH}{TEXT}
+%
+%     #1 BOXWIDTH:  box width 
+%     #2 TEXT:      text
+%
+%    \rightshfbox{TEXT}
+%
+%     #1 TEXT:      text
+%
+% %rightshfr@me#1 shadow width, #2 space, #3 boxwidth, #4 text%
+\long\def\rightshfr@me#1#2#3#4{\leavevmode%
+ \vbox{\hbox{\kern#1\vbox{\hsize#3\vbox{\kern-#1\hbox{%
+ \kern-#1\fb@xit{\fboxrule}{#2}{#3}{#4}}\hrule\@height#1}}%
+ \vrule\@width#1}}\strut} 
+% %rightshframe%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% #1 width, #2 text%%%%%
+\long\def\rightshframe#1#2{%
+ \rightshfr@me{\fboxsep}{\fboxsep}{#1}{#2}}
+% %rightshfbox%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% #1 text%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\long\def\rightshfbox#1{\leavevmode%
+ \vbox{\hbox{\kern\fboxsep\vbox{\vbox{\kern-\fboxsep\hbox{%
+ \kern-\fboxsep\fbox{#1}}\hrule\@height\fboxsep}}%
+ \vrule\@width\fboxsep}}} 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{ffboxit}
+%  \begin{macro}{\ffparbox}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *****************************************
+% * 箱 (環境版)                           *
+% *   November 2, 1991 by Shinsaku Fujita *
+% *****************************************
+% After Chapter 12 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+% %%%%%%1991 November 2 %%%ffboxit%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\ffboxit{\par\vskip1pc\hfil\vbox\bgroup
+    \hrule\hbox\bgroup\vrule\kern3pt\vbox\bgroup\kern3pt}
+\def\endffboxit{\kern3pt\egroup\kern3pt\vrule\egroup\hrule\egroup
+             \hfil\\}
+\def\ffparbox#1#2{\vbox{\hsize=#1 \noindent\strut #2\strut}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \section{Framed box environment with and without shadows}
+%
+% \subsection{Framed box environment without shadows}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%1991 November 2 %%%frameboxit%%%old definition%%%%%%%%%%
+%                                   with centering function
+%\def\frameboxit#1{\par\vskip1pc\hfil\vbox\bgroup
+%    \hrule\hbox\bgroup\vrule\kern3pt\vbox\bgroup\kern3pt 
+%    \vbox\bgroup\hsize=#1 \noindent\strut
+%    \@minipagetrue%
+%    \everypar{\global\@minipagefalse\everypar{}}}
+%\def\endframeboxit{\strut\egroup\kern3pt\egroup%
+%\kern3pt\vrule\egroup
+%             \hrule\egroup\hfil\\}
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% <<Base box for box environments>>
+% \begin{fr@meboxit}{LWIDTH}{SPACE}{BWIDTH}
+%     LWIDTH:  line thickness
+%     SPACE:   spacing around the text
+%     BWIDTH:  box width 
+% \end{fr@meboxit}
+%
+% %%fr@meboxit%%%%%#1 line width, #2 space, #3 width%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%\def\fr@meboxit#1#2#3{\gdef\fr@meline{#1}\gdef\fr@mesp{#2}%
+%    \hbox\bgroup\vbox\bgroup%
+%    \hrule\@height#1\hbox\bgroup%
+%    \vrule\@width#1\kern#2\vbox\bgroup%
+%    \kern#2\vbox\bgroup\hsize=#3\strut%
+%    \@minipagetrue%
+%    \everypar{\global\@minipagefalse\everypar{}}}
+%\def\endfr@meboxit{\strut\egroup%
+%\kern\fr@mesp\egroup\kern\fr@mesp\egroup\hrule\@height\fr@meline%
+%\egroup\vrule\@width\fr@meline\egroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{fr@meboxit}
+%  \begin{environment}{frameboxit}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%revised by S. Fujita, January 16, 1993%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\long\def\fr@meboxit#1#2#3{\gdef\fr@meline{#1}\gdef\fr@mesp{#2}%
+% %    \setbox4=\vbox\bgroup\hsize=#3\@parboxrestore\ignorespaces}
+    \global\setbox4=\hbox\bgroup\minipage{#3}}
+% %\def\endfr@meboxit{\egroup%
+\def\endfr@meboxit{\endminipage\egroup%
+    \hbox{\vbox{\hrule\@height\fr@meline%
+    \hbox{\vrule\@width\fr@meline\kern\fr@mesp%
+    \vbox{\kern\fr@meline\kern\fr@mesp\box4\kern\fr@mesp}%
+% %    \vbox{\kern\fr@mesp\box4\kern\fr@mesp}%
+    \kern\fr@mesp}\hrule\@height\fr@meline}%
+    \vrule\@width\fr@meline}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%revised by S. Fujita, January 16, 1993%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\frameboxit#1{\leavevmode\fr@meboxit{\fboxrule}{\fboxsep}{#1}}
+\let\endframeboxit=\endfr@meboxit
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsection{Framed box environment with shadows}
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{lshfr@meboxit}
+%  \begin{environment}{lshfboxit}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *****************************************
+% * 影のついた箱 (環境版)                 *
+% *   January 16, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita *
+% *   \sh@hwidth: 水平の影の太さ          *
+% *   \sh@vwidth: 垂直の影の太さ          *
+% *****************************************
+% After Chapter 12 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+% <<Base box for box environments>>  See above
+% \begin{fr@meboxit}{LWIDTH}{SPACE}{BWIDTH}
+%     LWIDTH:  line thickness
+%     SPACE:   spacing around the text
+%     BWIDTH:  box width 
+% \end{fr@meboxit}
+%
+% <<Base box environment with left shadow>>
+% \begin{lshfr@meboxit}{HSWIDTH}{VSWIDTH}{SPACE}{BWIDTH}
+%     HSWIDTH: the thickness of the horizontal shadow
+%     VSWIDTH: the thickness of the vertical shadow
+%     SPACE:   spacing around the text
+%     BWIDTH:  box width 
+% \end{lshfr@meboxit}
+%
+% <<Box environment with left shadow>>
+% \begin{lshfboxit}{BWIDTH}
+%     BWIDTH:  box width 
+% \end{lshfboxit}
+%
+% %%%lshfr@meboxit#1 #2 shadow width, #3 space, #4 boxwidth%%%%  
+\def\lshfr@meboxit#1#2#3#4{\gdef\sh@hwidth{#1}\gdef\sh@vwidth{#2}%
+\leavevmode%
+ \vbox\bgroup\hbox\bgroup\hsize #4\vbox\bgroup%
+ \hbox\bgroup\vrule\@width\sh@vwidth%
+ \vbox\bgroup\kern-\sh@hwidth\fr@meboxit{\fboxrule}{#3}{#4}}
+\def\endlshfr@meboxit{\endfr@meboxit%%%%\kern-\fboxrule
+ \egroup\kern-\sh@vwidth\egroup%
+ \hrule\@height\sh@hwidth\egroup\egroup\egroup%
+ \strut\kern\sh@hwidth\relax} 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%lshfboxit%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% #1 width %%%%%%%%
+\def\lshfboxit#1{\leavevmode%
+ \lshfr@meboxit{\fboxsep}{\fboxsep}{\fboxsep}{#1}}
+\let\endlshfboxit=\endlshfr@meboxit
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{rshfr@meboxit}
+%  \begin{environment}{rshfboxit}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% <<Base box environment with right shadow>>
+% \begin{rshfr@meboxit}{HSWIDTH}{VSWIDTH}{SPACE}{BWIDTH}
+%     HSWIDTH: the thickness of the horizontal shadow
+%     VSWIDTH: the thickness of the vertical shadow
+%     SPACE:   spacing around the text
+%     BWIDTH:  box width 
+% \end{rshfr@meboxit}
+%
+% <<Box environment with right shadow>>
+% \begin{rshfboxit}{BWIDTH}
+%     BWIDTH:  box width 
+% \end{rshfboxit}
+%
+% %%rshfr@meboxit#1 #2 shadow width, #3 space, #4 boxwidth%%%  
+\def\rshfr@meboxit#1#2#3#4{%
+ \gdef\sh@hwidth{#1}\gdef\sh@vwidth{#2}%
+ \leavevmode%
+ \vbox\bgroup\hbox\bgroup\kern\sh@vwidth%
+ \vbox\bgroup\hsize#4\vbox\bgroup%
+ \kern-\sh@hwidth\hbox\bgroup\kern-\sh@vwidth%
+ \fr@meboxit{\fboxrule}{#3}{#4}}
+\def\endrshfr@meboxit{\endfr@meboxit\egroup%
+ \hrule\@height\sh@hwidth%
+ \egroup\egroup\vrule\@width\sh@vwidth\egroup\egroup\strut} 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%rshfboxit%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% #1 width%%%%%%%%
+\def\rshfboxit#1{\leavevmode%
+ \rshfr@meboxit{\fboxsep}{\fboxsep}{\fboxsep}{#1}}
+\let\endrshfboxit=\endrshfr@meboxit
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsection{Framed box environment with gradient shadows}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\hsgr@d}
+%  \begin{macro}{\vsgr@d}
+%  \begin{macro}{\vwgr@d}
+%  \begin{macro}{\hwgr@d}
+%  \begin{macro}{\vsepgr@d}
+%  \begin{macro}{\hsepgr@d}
+%  \begin{macro}{\nrep}
+%  \begin{macro}{\nrepmax}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%parameters%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newdimen\hsgr@d \newdimen\vsgr@d
+\newdimen\vwgr@d \newdimen\hwgr@d
+\newdimen\vsepgr@d \newdimen\hsepgr@d
+\newcount\nrep \newcount\nrepmax
+%\nrepmax=20
+\nrepmax=25
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{grshfr@meboxit}
+%  \begin{environment}{grshfboxit}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *****************************************
+% * 斜の影のついた箱 (環境版)             *
+% * Box environments with gradient shadow *
+% *   January 16, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita *
+% *****************************************
+% After Chapter 12 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+% <<Base box environment with gradient right shadow>>
+% \begin{grshfr@meboxit}{HSWIDTH}{VSWIDTH}{SPACE}{BWIDTH}
+%     HSWIDTH: the thickness of the horizontal shadow
+%     VSWIDTH: the thickness of the vertical shadow
+%     SPACE:   spacing around the text
+%     BWIDTH:  box width 
+% \end{grshfr@meboxit}
+%
+% <<Box environment with gradient right shadow>>
+% \begin{grshfboxit}{BWIDTH}
+%     BWIDTH:  box width 
+% \end{grshfboxit}
+% %%%%%%%%grshfr@meboxit#1 #2 shadow width, #3 space, #4 boxwidth%%%
+\def\grshfr@meboxit#1#2#3#4{%
+ \hsgr@d=0pt \advance\hsgr@d by#1 \divide\hsgr@d by\nrepmax%
+ \vsgr@d=0pt \advance\vsgr@d by#2 \divide\vsgr@d by\nrepmax%
+ \leavevmode%
+ \setbox0=\vbox\bgroup\fr@meboxit{\fboxrule}{#3}{#4}}
+\def\brb@xit#1{\vbox{\setbox1=\hbox{#1}%
+       \offinterlineskip%
+  \hbox{\copy1\vsepgr@d=\nrep\vsgr@d%
+       \vwgr@d=\ht1\advance\vwgr@d by-\vsepgr@d%
+       \vrule\@height\vwgr@d\@width\vsgr@d}%
+  \hbox{\hsepgr@d=\nrep\hsgr@d\kern\hsepgr@d%
+       \vbox{\hwgr@d=\wd1\advance\hwgr@d by-\hsepgr@d%
+       \hrule\@height\hsgr@d\@width\hwgr@d}}}}
+\def\lprb@xit{\expandafter\setbox0=\expandafter\brb@xit{\box0}}
+\def\endgrshfr@meboxit{\endfr@meboxit\egroup%
+ \nrep=\@ne\@whilenum\nrep<\nrepmax\do%
+ {\lprb@xit\advance\nrep\@ne}\box0\relax} 
+% %%%%% in TeX grammer
+%\def\endgrshfr@meboxit{\endfr@meboxit\egroup%
+% \nrep=\@ne \loop \lprb@xit \advance\nrep\@ne%
+% \ifnum \nrep<\nrepmax \repeat \box0\relax} 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%grshfboxit%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% #1 width, #2 text%%%%%%%%
+\def\grshfboxit#1{\leavevmode%
+  \grshfr@meboxit{\fboxsep}{\fboxsep}{\fboxsep}{#1}}
+\let\endgrshfboxit=\endgrshfr@meboxit
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{glshfr@meboxit}
+%  \begin{environment}{glshfboxit}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% <<Base box environment with gradient left shadow>>
+% \begin{glshfr@meboxit}{HSWIDTH}{VSWIDTH}{SPACE}{BWIDTH}
+%     HSWIDTH: the thickness of the horizontal shadow
+%     VSWIDTH: the thickness of the vertical shadow
+%     SPACE:   spacing around the text
+%     BWIDTH:  box width 
+% \end{glshfr@meboxit}
+%
+% <<Box environment with gradient left shadow>>
+% \begin{glshfboxit}{BWIDTH}
+%     BWIDTH:  box width 
+% \end{glshfboxit}
+% %%%%%%%%glshfr@meboxit#1 #2 shadow width, #3 space, #4 boxwidth%%
+\def\glshfr@meboxit#1#2#3#4{%
+ \hsgr@d=0pt \advance\hsgr@d by#1 \divide\hsgr@d by\nrepmax%
+ \vsgr@d=0pt \advance\vsgr@d by#2 \divide\vsgr@d by\nrepmax%
+ \leavevmode%
+ \setbox0=\vbox\bgroup\fr@meboxit{\fboxrule}{#3}{#4}}
+\def\blb@xit#1{%
+  \vbox{\setbox1=\hbox{#1}%
+       \offinterlineskip%
+       \vsepgr@d=\nrep\vsgr@d%
+       \vwgr@d=\ht1\advance\vwgr@d by-\vsepgr@d%
+       \hsepgr@d=\nrep\hsgr@d%
+       \hwgr@d=\wd1\advance\hwgr@d by-\hsepgr@d%
+   \hbox{\vrule\@height\vwgr@d\@width\vsgr@d\copy1}%
+   \hbox{\kern-\vsgr@d%
+         \vrule\@height\hsgr@d\@width\hwgr@d}}}
+% %%       \hbox{\vbox{\hrule\@height\hsgr@d\@width\hwgr@d}}}}
+\def\lplb@xit{\expandafter\setbox0=\expandafter\blb@xit{\box0}}
+\def\endglshfr@meboxit{\endfr@meboxit\egroup%
+ \nrep=\@ne\@whilenum\nrep<\nrepmax\do%
+ {\lplb@xit\advance\nrep\@ne}\box0\relax} 
+% %%%%% in TeX grammer
+%\def\endglshfr@meboxit{\endfr@meboxit\egroup%
+% \nrep=\@ne \loop \lplb@xit \advance\nrep\@ne%
+% \ifnum\nrep<\nrepmax\repeat\box0\relax} 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%%%%glshfboxit%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% #1 width, #2 text%%%
+\def\glshfboxit#1{\leavevmode%
+ \glshfr@meboxit{\fboxsep}{\fboxsep}{\fboxsep}{#1}}
+\let\endglshfboxit=\endglshfr@meboxit
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \section{(Mini)screen environment}
+% \subsection{(Mini)screen environment without a title}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\@oval}
+%  \begin{macro}{\h@b@x}
+%  \begin{macro}{\@vrf@}
+%  \changes{v2.00}{2000/06/15}{ybaselineshift etc.}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{ybaselineshift}{%
+\newdimen\ybaselineshift \ybaselineshift=\z@}{}
+\@ifundefined{tbaselineshift}{%
+\newdimen\tbaselineshift \tbaselineshift=\z@}{}
+\newdimen\@savetbaselineshift \@savetbaselineshift=\z@
+\def\@oval(#1,#2)[#3]{\begingroup\boxmaxdepth \maxdimen
+  \@ovttrue \@ovbtrue \@ovltrue \@ovrtrue
+  \@tfor\@tempa :=#3\do{\csname @ov\@tempa false\endcsname}\@ovxx
+  #1\unitlength \@ovyy #2\unitlength
+  \@tempdimb \ifdim \@ovyy >\@ovxx \@ovxx\else \@ovyy \fi
+  \advance\@tempdimb -2pt\relax
+  \@getcirc \@tempdimb
+  \@ovro \ht\@tempboxa \@ovri \dp\@tempboxa
+  \@ovdx\@ovxx \advance\@ovdx -\@tempdima \divide\@ovdx \tw@
+  \@ovdy\@ovyy \advance\@ovdy -\@tempdima \divide\@ovdy \tw@
+  \@circlefnt \setbox\@tempboxa
+  \hbox{\if@ovr \@ovvert32\kern -\@tempdima \fi
+  \if@ovl \kern \@ovxx \@ovvert01\kern -\@tempdima \kern -\@ovxx \fi
+  \if@ovt \@ovhorz \kern -\@ovxx \fi
+  \if@ovb \raise \@ovyy \@ovhorz \fi}\advance\@ovdx\@ovro
+  \advance\@ovdy\@ovro \ht\@tempboxa\z@ \dp\@tempboxa\z@
+  \@put{-\@ovdx}{-\@ovdy}{\box\@tempboxa}%
+  \endgroup}
+\def\h@b@x#1#2#3{\hbox to\dimen1%
+ {\@oval(#3,#3)[#1]\hfil\@oval(#3,#3)[#2]}}
+\def\@vrf@#1#2{\vskip#1\leaders\vrule\@width#2\vfil\vskip#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{miniscreen}
+%  \begin{environment}{screen}
+%  \changes{v2.00}{2000/06/15}{ybaselineshift etc.}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ******************
+% * miniscreen環境 *
+% ******************
+%
+% ASCII版Micro\TeXのscreen環境を枠の幅を指定できるように改変
+%
+%   ifcase文 ==> 直接計算
+%   dimen類  ==> dimen0 to dimen5
+%   box類    ==> box0 and box1
+%
+% After Chapter 12 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+% miniscreen environment
+%
+\let\miniscreentoprule=\hrule
+\def\miniscreen{\@ifnextchar[{\@miniscreen}{\@miniscreen[0]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\miniscreen{\@ifnextchar[{\@miniscreen}{\@miniscreen[0]}}
+\def\@miniscreen[#1]#2{\dimen1=#2\relax%
+\@savetbaselineshift\tbaselineshift \tbaselineshift\z@
+\@tempcnta=-2 \multiply\@tempcnta by#1\relax%
+\advance\@tempcnta by 20\relax \dimen5=1pt
+\multiply\dimen5\@tempcnta
+\dimen4=-1pt \multiply\dimen4 by#1\relax
+\advance\dimen4 by 10pt
+\dimen3=\dimen4 \advance\dimen3 by -.2pt
+\par\vspace{.3\baselineskip}%
+\dimen2=\dimen1 \advance\dimen2 by .1pt
+\advance\dimen1 -\dimen5\relax%
+\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup\minipage{\dimen1 
+\tbaselineshift\@savetbaselineshift}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endminiscreen{\endminipage\egroup%
+\setbox1=\hbox to\dimen2{\hfil\vbox{\offinterlineskip%
+\thinlines\unitlength=1pt
+\miniscreentoprule%\hrule
+\kern\dimen3%
+\h@b@x{tl}{tr}{\@tempcnta}%
+\kern-\dimen4\box0\h@b@x{bl}{br}{\@tempcnta}%
+\kern-.4pt\hrule}\hfil}\dimen0=\ht1\noindent%
+\hbox to\dimen2{\hbox to.4pt{%
+\vbox to\dimen0{\@vrf@{\dimen4}{.4pt}}\hss}%
+\box1\hbox to.2pt{%
+ \hss\vbox to\dimen0{\@vrf@{\dimen4}{.4pt}}}\hss}}%
+% %%%%%%alternative
+%\def\miniscreen{\@ifnextchar[{\@miniscreen}{\@miniscreen[0]}}
+%\def\@miniscreen[#1]#2{\noindent\minipage{#2}\@screen[#1]}
+%\def\endminiscreen{\endscreen\endminipage}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\screen{\@ifnextchar[{\@screen}{\@miniscreen[0]{\linewidth}}}
+\def\@screen[#1]{\miniscreen[#1]{\linewidth}}
+\let\endscreen=\endminiscreen
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsection{(Mini)screen environment with a title}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\tboxscreentoprule}
+%  \begin{macro}{\tboxtitle}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tboxscreentoprule{%
+\hbox to\wd0{\smash{\lower.4ex\hbox{%
+\fboxsep=2pt \fbox{\small \tboxtitle}}}\hrulefill}}
+\def\tboxtitle{\bf Memorandum}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{\tboxminiscreen}
+%  \begin{environment}{\tboxscreen}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ******************
+% * tboxscreen環境 *
+% ******************
+% 1996/06/04 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+\def\tboxminiscreen{\@ifnextchar[{\vskip8pt
+ \let\miniscreentoprule=\tboxscreentoprule%
+ \@miniscreen}{\vskip8pt
+ \let\miniscreentoprule=\tboxscreentoprule%
+ \@miniscreen[0]}}
+\let\endtboxminiscreen=\endminiscreen
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tboxscreen{\@ifnextchar[{\@tboxscreen}%
+{\@tboxscreen[0]}}
+\def\@tboxscreen[#1]{\tboxminiscreen[#1]{\linewidth}}
+\let\endtboxscreen=\endtboxminiscreen
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \section{Further boxes}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\sboxit}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ******************************
+% * \sboxit 左右の余裕のない箱 *
+% ******************************
+% After Chapter 12 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\def\sboxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox%
+{\vrule\vbox{\kern3pt\vbox{\hsize #1 \noindent #2}%
+\kern3pt}\vrule}\hrule}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Boxes with no height or no width} 
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\bury}
+%  \begin{macro}{\pushtowall}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ***********************
+% * bury and pushtowall *
+% ***********************
+% After Chapter 7 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+%
+%  \bury[下げ幅]{内容}
+%    下げ幅のデフォルト値は，\normalbaselineksipの半分
+%
+%  (旧) \def\bury#1{\smash{\lower.5\normalbaselineskip\hbox{#1}}}
+%       これは，「化学と生化学のためのLaTeX」に載せた定義です．
+%       以下の定義は，下げ幅をオプション引数として取るように
+%       拡張したものです．
+%
+\def\bury{\@ifnextchar [{\@bury}{\@bury[.5\normalbaselineskip]}}
+\def\@bury[#1]#2{\smash{\lower#1\hbox{#2}}}
+%
+%  \pushtowall{内容}
+%    水平方向の押し付ける命令 (\smashの水平方向版)
+%
+\def\finpushw@ll{\wd0=0pt \box0}
+\def\makepushw@ll#1{\setbox0=\hbox{#1}\finpushw@ll}
+\def\mathpushw@ll#1#2{\setbox0=\hbox{$\m@th#1{#2}$}\finpushw@ll}
+\def\pushtowall{\relax \leavevmode
+ \ifmmode\def\next{\mathpalette\mathpushw@ll}
+ \else\let\next\makepushw@ll \fi \next}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\penetrate}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%   \penetrate{DIM}{OBJ}
+%   幅無し<OBJ>を、印字位置はそのままにして、<DIM>だけ移動させる。この時
+%   引き続く文字の印字位置は<OBJ>がなかったとした時の位置になる。
+%   (\bury命令の水平方向版)
+%
+%   (比較)
+%     aaa  bbb  \penetrate{-50pt}{ccc} ddd eee fff \\
+%     aaa  bbb  \hspace{-50pt} ccc ddd eee fff \\
+%
+\def\penetrate#1#2{\pushtowall{\hbox{\hskip#1\hbox{#2}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Symbols for instant photography} 
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\cyan}
+%  \begin{macro}{\magenta}
+%  \begin{macro}{\yellow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\cyandv}
+%  \begin{macro}{\magentadv}
+%  \begin{macro}{\yellowdv}
+%  \begin{macro}{\agxlatent}
+%  \begin{macro}{\agxdv}
+%  \begin{macro}{\agx}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ***********************
+% * instant photography *
+% ***********************
+% After Chapter 7 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\def\cyan{\mbox{$\bigcirc$\kern-.06em{--}\kern-.06em
+ \ooalign{\hfil
+ \raise.05ex\hbox{\scriptsize C}\hfil\cr\cr$\bigcirc$}\,}}
+\def\magenta{\mbox{$\bigcirc$\kern-.06em{--}\kern-.06em
+ \ooalign{\hfil
+ \raise.05ex\hbox{\scriptsize M}\hfil\cr\cr$\bigcirc$}\,}}
+\def\yellow{\mbox{$\bigcirc$\kern-.06em{--}\kern-.06em
+ \ooalign{\hfil
+ \raise.05ex\hbox{\scriptsize Y}\hfil\cr\cr$\bigcirc$}\,}}
+\def\cyandv{\mbox{$\bigotimes$\kern-.06em{--}\kern-.06em
+ \ooalign{\hfil
+ \raise.05ex\hbox{\scriptsize C}\hfil\cr\cr$\bigcirc$}\,}}
+\def\magentadv{\mbox{$\bigotimes$\kern-.06em{--}\kern-.06em
+ \ooalign{\hfil
+ \raise.05ex\hbox{\scriptsize M}\hfil\cr\cr$\bigcirc$}\,}}
+\def\yellowdv{\mbox{$\bigotimes$\kern-.06em{--}\kern-.06em
+ \ooalign{\hfil
+ \raise.05ex\hbox{\scriptsize Y}\hfil\cr\cr$\bigcirc$}\,}}
+\def\agxlatent{%
+ \mbox{\ooalign{%
+ \hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\footnotesize $\bullet$}\hfil\cr\cr
+ $\triangle$}\,}} 
+\def\agxdv{%
+ \mbox{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{%
+ \small $\spadesuit$}\hfil\cr\cr
+ $\triangle$}\,}} 
+\def\agx{\mbox{$\triangle$}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Various arrows with fixed length}
+% 
+%  \begin{macro}{\llongrightarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\llongleftarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\llongleftrightarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\Equilibarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\Llongrightarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\Llongleftarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\Llongleftrightarrow}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ***********************
+% * various long arrows *
+% ***********************
+% After Chapter 18 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\def\llongrightarrow{%%%--->
+\relbar\joinrel\relbar\joinrel\relbar\joinrel\rightarrow}
+\def\llongleftarrow{%%%<---
+ \leftarrow\joinrel\relbar\joinrel\relbar\joinrel\relbar}
+\def\llongleftrightarrow{%%%<--->
+ \leftarrow\joinrel\relbar\joinrel\relbar\joinrel\rightarrow}
+\def\Equilibarrow{%%%<--- and --->
+ \mathrel{\ooalign{\raise.35ex\hbox{$\llongrightarrow$}\crcr
+ \lower.35ex\hbox{$\llongleftarrow$}}}}
+\def\Llongrightarrow{%%%===>
+ \Relbar\joinrel\Relbar\joinrel\Relbar\joinrel\Rightarrow}
+\def\Llongleftarrow{%%%<===
+ \Leftarrow\joinrel\Relbar\joinrel\Relbar\joinrel\Relbar}
+\def\Llongleftrightarrow{%%<===>
+ \Leftarrow\joinrel\Relbar\joinrel\Relbar\joinrel\Rightarrow}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\llongleftharpoondown}
+%  \begin{macro}{\llongrightharpoondown}
+%  \begin{macro}{\equilibarrow}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\llongleftharpoondown{%%% /---
+ \leftharpoondown\joinrel\relbar\joinrel\relbar\joinrel\relbar}
+\def\llongrightharpoonup{%%%---/
+ \relbar\joinrel\relbar\joinrel\relbar\joinrel\rightharpoonup}
+\def\equilibarrow{%%% /--- and ---/
+ \mathrel{\ooalign{%
+ \raise.3ex\hbox{$\llongrightharpoonup$}\crcr
+ \lower.3ex\hbox{$\llongleftharpoondown$}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\eqproton}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *******************************
+% * 平衡の両側矢印の上にH+を書く*
+% *******************************
+\def\eqproton{\stackrel{{\rm \displaystyle H}^{+}}{\Equilibarrow}} 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\lllongrightarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\lllongleftarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\lllongleftrightarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\Equiliblongarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\Lllongrightarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\Lllongleftarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\Lllongleftrightarrow}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ****************
+% * 長い長い矢印 *
+% ****************
+\def\lllongrightarrow{\relbar\joinrel\relbar%
+ \joinrel\relbar\joinrel\relbar\joinrel\rightarrow}
+\def\lllongleftarrow{%%%<-------
+ \leftarrow\joinrel\relbar\joinrel\relbar%
+ \joinrel\relbar\joinrel\relbar}
+\def\lllongleftrightarrow{%%%<------->
+ \leftarrow\joinrel\relbar\joinrel\relbar%
+ \joinrel\relbar\joinrel\rightarrow}
+\def\Equiliblongarrow{%%%<------- and ------->
+ \mathrel{\ooalign{\raise.35ex\hbox{$\lllongrightarrow$}\crcr
+ \lower.35ex\hbox{$\lllongleftarrow$}}}}
+\def\Lllongrightarrow{%%%=======>
+ \Relbar\joinrel\Relbar\joinrel\Relbar\joinrel%
+ \Relbar\joinrel\Rightarrow}
+\def\Lllongleftarrow{%%%<=======
+ \Leftarrow\joinrel\Relbar\joinrel\Relbar\joinrel%
+ \Relbar\joinrel\Relbar}
+\def\Lllongleftrightarrow{%%<=======>
+ \Leftarrow\joinrel\Relbar\joinrel\Relbar\joinrel%
+ \Relbar\joinrel\Rightarrow}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\lllongleftharpoondown}
+%  \begin{macro}{\lllongrightharpoondown}
+%  \begin{macro}{\equiliblongarrow}
+%  \begin{macro}{\deHBr}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lllongleftharpoondown{%%% /-------
+ \leftharpoondown\joinrel\relbar\joinrel\relbar%
+ \joinrel\relbar\joinrel\relbar}
+\def\lllongrightharpoonup{%%%-------/
+ \relbar\joinrel\relbar\joinrel\relbar\joinrel%
+ \relbar\joinrel\rightharpoonup}
+\def\equiliblongarrow{%%% /------ and ------/
+ \mathrel{\ooalign{%
+ \raise.3ex\hbox{$\lllongrightharpoonup$}\crcr
+ \lower.3ex\hbox{$\lllongleftharpoondown$}}}}
+% %%%%%
+\def\deHBr{\stackrel{\displaystyle \rm -HBr}%
+{\stackrel{\displaystyle \lllongrightarrow}{\rm E2}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Chemical Corrections}
+%
+% \subsection{Correction commands}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\chemcorr}
+%  \begin{macro}{\leavechemcorr}
+%
+%  \changes{v2.00a}{2000/11/03}{chemcorr 3.0pt into 3.5pt}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ********************
+% * chemform command *
+% ********************
+% After Chapter 9 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\def\chemcorr{%
+ \fontdimen16\textfont2=3.5pt
+ \fontdimen17\textfont2=3.5pt
+ %\fontdimen14\textfont2=3.8pt
+}
+\def\leavechemcorr{%
+ \fontdimen16\textfont2=1.49998pt
+ \fontdimen17\textfont2=2.47217pt
+ %\fontdimen14\textfont2=3.62892pt
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Chem Version}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\ifnewl@tex}
+%
+% The `chem' for mathversion is introduced to describe chemical equations. 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifnewl@tex \newl@textrue
+\@ifundefined{DeclareMathVersion}%
+ {\global\newl@texfalse}{\global\newl@textrue}%
+%
+\ifnewl@tex\@ifundefined{mv@chem}{\DeclareMathVersion{chem}%
+ \SetSymbolFont{letters}{chem}{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}}{}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\chemform}
+%
+%  \changes{v2.00a}{2000/11/03}{change the position of chemcorr 
+%  in chemform command}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifnewl@tex
+\def\chemform#1{{\mathversion{chem}%
+$\chemcorr #1$\leavechemcorr}}
+\else
+\def\chemform#1{\chemcorr
+$\rm #1$\leavechemcorr}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{chemmath}
+% 
+%  \changes{v2.00a}{2000/11/03}{change the position of chemcorr 
+%  in chemmath command}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ************************
+% * chemmath environment *
+% ************************
+% After Chapter 9 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\ifnewl@tex
+\def\chemmath{\begingroup\mathversion{chem}\[\chemcorr}
+\def\endchemmath{\]\endgroup\leavechemcorr}
+\else
+\def\chemmath{\chemcorr\[\rm}
+\def\endchemmath{\] \leavechemcorr}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{environment}
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{chemeqn}
+% 
+%  \changes{v2.00a}{2000/11/03}{change the position of chemcorr 
+%  in chemeqn command}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ***********************
+% * chemeqn environment *
+% ***********************
+% After Chapter 9 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\ifnewl@tex
+\def\chemeqn{\begingroup\mathversion{chem}\equation\chemcorr}
+\def\endchemeqn{\endequation\endgroup\leavechemcorr}
+\else
+\def\chemeqn{\chemcorr\equation\rm}
+\def\endchemeqn{\endequation\leavechemcorr}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{environment}
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{chemeqnarray}
+% 
+%  \changes{v2.00a}{2000/11/03}{change the position of chemcorr 
+%  in chemeqnarray command}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ****************************
+% * chemeqnarray environment *
+% ****************************
+% After Chapter 9 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\ifnewl@tex
+\def\chemeqnarray{\stepcounter{equation}
+ \let\@currentlabel=\theequation
+ \global\@eqnswtrue
+ \global\@eqcnt\z@\tabskip\@centering
+ \let\\=\@eqncr 
+ \begingroup\mathversion{chem}
+$$\chemcorr\halign to \displaywidth\bgroup
+  \@eqnsel\hskip\@centering
+  $\rm \displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$ &
+  \global\@eqcnt\@ne 
+  \hskip \arraycolsep \hfil$\rm{##}$\hfil &
+  \global\@eqcnt\tw@ \hskip \arraycolsep 
+  $\rm \displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$\hfil 
+  \tabskip\@centering & 
+  \llap{##}\tabskip\z@\cr}
+\def\endchemeqnarray{\endeqnarray\endgroup
+\leavechemcorr}
+\else
+\def\chemeqnarray{\stepcounter{equation}
+ \let\@currentlabel=\theequation
+ \global\@eqnswtrue
+ \global\@eqcnt\z@\tabskip\@centering
+ \let\\=\@eqncr \chemcorr
+$$\halign to \displaywidth\bgroup
+  \@eqnsel\hskip\@centering
+  $\rm \displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$ &
+  \global\@eqcnt\@ne 
+  \hskip \arraycolsep \hfil$\rm{##}$\hfil &
+  \global\@eqcnt\tw@ \hskip \arraycolsep 
+  $\rm \displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$\hfil 
+  \tabskip\@centering & 
+  \llap{##}\tabskip\z@\cr}
+\def\endchemeqnarray{\endeqnarray
+\leavechemcorr}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{environment}
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{chemeqnarray*}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *****************************
+% * chemeqnarray* environment *
+% *****************************
+% After Chapter 9 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+% bug fix (1996/06/15) the end command is replaced. 
+\let\@seqncr=\@eqncr
+\ifnewl@tex
+\@namedef{chemeqnarray*}{%
+\def\@eqncr{\nonumber\@seqncr}\chemeqnarray}
+\@namedef{endchemeqnarray*}{\nonumber\endchemeqnarray}
+\else
+\@namedef{chemeqnarray*}{%
+\def\@eqncr{\nonumber\@seqncr\rm}\chemeqnarray}
+\@namedef{endchemeqnarray*}{\nonumber\endchemeqnarray}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{environment}
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{chemeqnarraya}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *****************
+% * chemeqnarraya *
+% *****************
+% After Chapter 9 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by S. Fujita
+% revised may 21 1992 by S. Fujita
+\def\chemeqnarraya{\chemeqn@rraya \chemeqnarray} 
+\def\chemeqn@rraya{%
+ \c@enumi=\c@equation 
+ \advance\c@enumi\@ne
+ \c@equation=\z@
+ \@ifundefined{chapter}%
+{\def\theequation{\theenumi\alph{equation}}}%
+{\def\theequation{%
+\thechapter.\theenumi\alph{equation}}}}
+\def\endchemeqnarraya{\endchemeqnarray 
+\global\c@equation=\c@enumi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{environment}
+%
+% \section{XyMcompd and XyMtab Environments}
+%
+% These environments are designed for XyM Markup Language 
+% to treat a XyM tag and a XyMtab tag. 
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{XyMcompd}
+%  \changes{v2.00}{1999/03/16}{New Environment}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\XyMcompd(#1,#2)(#3,#4)#5#6{%
+\begingroup
+\edef\xymrefa{#5}\edef\xymrefb{#6}%
+\edef\kkk{#1}%
+\begin{tabular}{c}
+\ifx\kkk\empty\else
+\begin{picture}(#1,#2)(#3,#4)\fi\ignorespaces}
+\def\endXyMcompd{%
+\ifx\kkk\empty\else\end{picture}\fi
+\\[-\baselineskip]
+\ifx\xymrefa\empty\else{\bf \compd\xymrefb
+\expandafter\label{\xymrefa}}\fi
+\end{tabular}\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{environment}
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{XyMtab}
+%  \changes{v2.00}{1999/03/16}{New Environment}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\XyMtab#1{\center\tabular{#1c}}
+\def\endXyMtab{\endtabular\endcenter}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{environment}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\derivlist}
+%  \changes{v2.00}{1999/03/17}{New command}
+%
+% For example, derivatives are specified as follows: 
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%  \derivlist{X = Cl;X = F;X = Me}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\derivlist#1{%
+\mbox{}\\
+\begingroup\def\arraystretch{0.7}%
+\begin{tabular}{l}
+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%
+\ifx\member\empty\else%
+\hbox to2em{\hss\derivnum}:\space\member \\
+\fi}\end{tabular}\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+% This command is used in the XyMderiv environment. 
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{XyMderiv}
+%  \changes{v2.00}{1999/03/17}{New Environment}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\XyMderiv{\tabular{c}}
+\def\endXyMderiv{\endtabular}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{environment}
+%
+% \section{Useful commands}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\endash}
+%  \begin{macro}{\Cent}
+%  \begin{macro}{\degC}
+%  \begin{macro}{\degF}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ***************
+% * temperature *
+% ***************
+% After Chapter 12 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\def\endash{\mbox{--{}}}
+\def\Cent{\mbox{\raise.9ex\hbox{%
+ \scriptsize$\circ$}\kern-.12em\hbox{C}}}
+\def\degC{\mbox{\kern-.2em\char'27\kern-.3em C}}
+\def\degF{\mbox{\kern-.2em\char'27\kern-.3em F}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+
+%  \begin{macro}{\yubin}
+%  \begin{macro}{\Yubin}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *******************
+% * yubin and Yubin *
+% *******************
+% After Chapter 12 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\def\yubin{$\overline{\top}$}
+\def\Yubin#1{\leavevmode\hbox{\vbox{\hrule\@height.12ex\@width.7em
+\kern.28ex\hrule\@height.12ex\@width.7em
+\hbox{\kern.35em\kern-.06ex
+\vbox{\hrule\@height1ex\@width.12ex}}}\kern.1em{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\xlethead}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ***********
+% * lethead *
+% ***********
+% After Chapter 18 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\def\xlethead#1{%
+ \kern-.6667\baselineskip \line{\hrulefill\phantom{ #1 }\hrulefill}
+ \kern-.6667\baselineskip \line{\hrulefill\phantom{ #1 }\hrulefill}
+ \kern-.6667\baselineskip \line{\hrulefill\hbox{ #1 }\hrulefill}}
+\def\lethead#1#2#3{\def\line{\hbox to\textwidth}
+ \vbox{\line{\hrulefill} 
+ \xlethead{#1} \xlethead{#2} \xlethead{#3}
+ \kern-.6667\baselineskip \line{\hrulefill}}} 
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\horizon}
+% 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ************
+% * baseline *
+% ************
+% After Chapter 12 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\def\horizon{\rule{12pt}{0.1pt}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Logos}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\resetfontsize}
+%  \begin{macro}{\Bib}
+%  \begin{macro}{\BibTeX}
+%  \begin{macro}{\jBibTeX}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% ********************************
+% * Redefinition of Logos        *
+% * January 3, 1993 by S. Fujita *
+% ********************************
+% After Chapter 12 of ``LaTeX for (Bio)Chemists'' by Shinsaku Fujita
+\newcount\TestCount \def\tmpkern{\kern0pt}
+\ifnewl@tex \else
+\def\resetfontsize{%
+ \ifx\@currsize\normalsize%
+  \def\tmpf@ntsize{%
+   \load{\footnotesize}{\sf}%
+   \load{\footnotesize}{\sl}%
+   \load{\footnotesize}{\bf}%
+   \def\tmpkern{\kern0.05em}%
+   \footnotesize}\fi
+ \ifx\@currsize\scriptsize \let\tmpf@ntsize=\tiny\fi
+ \ifx\@currsize\footnotesize \let\tmpf@ntsize=\tiny\fi
+ \ifx\@currsize\small \let\tmpf@ntsize=\scriptsize\fi
+ \ifx\@currsize\large \let\tmpf@ntsize=\small\fi
+ \ifx\@currsize\Large \let\tmpf@ntsize=\@normalsize\fi
+ \ifx\@currsize\LARGE \let\tmpf@ntsize=\large\fi
+ \ifx\@currsize\huge \let\tmpf@ntsize=\Large\fi
+ \ifx\@currsize\Huge \let\tmpf@ntsize=\LARGE\fi}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifnewl@tex \else
+\def\Bib{\ifnum \fam=\m@ne \fam=\z@ \fi\TestCount=\fam\leavevmode%
+    \edef\aaa{\fontname\scriptfont\fam}%
+    \edef\bbb{\fontname\textfont\fam}%
+ \resetfontsize%
+ \hbox{$\fam=\TestCount\textstyle B$}%
+ \ifx\aaa\bbb% 
+   \hbox{\tmpf@ntsize\bf
+  $\fam=\TestCount\kern-.025em I\kern-.045em B$}%
+ \else%
+   \hbox{$\fam\TestCount\scriptstyle\kern-.025em I\kern-.045em B$}%
+ \fi
+}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\BibTeX{\Bib\kern-.08em\TeX}
+%\def\jBibTeX{\leavevmode\lower.46ex\hbox{J}
+%\kern-.08em\Bib\kern-.08em\TeX}
+% %%\def\BibTeX{%
+% {\rm B\kern-.05em{\sc i\kern-.025emb}\kern-.08em\TeX}}
+% %%%%%1996/04/20 by Shinsaku Fujita%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\ifnewl@tex
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\BibTeX}{%
+    B\hbox{$\m@th$\csname S@\f@size\endcsname
+    \fontsize\sf@size\z@ \math@fontsfalse\selectfont
+    \kern-.025em I\kern-.045em B}\kern-.08em\TeX}
+\else \def\BibTeX{\Bib\kern-.08em\TeX} \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifnewl@tex
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\jBibTeX}{\mbox{%
+  \if b\expandafter\@car\f@series\@nil\boldmath\fi
+  \leavevmode\lower.46ex\hbox{J}\kern-.08em\BibTeX}}
+\else
+\def\jBibTeX{\leavevmode\lower.46ex\hbox{J}%
+ \kern-.08em\Bib\kern-.08em\TeX}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\jTeX}
+%  \begin{macro}{\pTeX}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\jTeX{\leavevmode\lower.46ex\hbox{J}\kern-.15em\TeX}
+\def\pTeX{p\kern-.15em\TeX}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\Sub}
+%  \begin{macro}{\Subbib}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifnewl@tex \else
+\def\Sub{\leavevmode\ifnum \fam=\m@ne \fam=\z@ \fi%
+    \TestCount=\fam{S}%
+    \edef\aaa{\fontname\scriptfont\fam}%
+    \edef\bbb{\fontname\textfont\fam}%
+    \ifx\aaa\bbb\resetfontsize%
+      \hbox{\tmpf@ntsize\bf%
+      $\fam=\TestCount\kern-.045em{U}\kern-.12em{B}$}%
+    \else%
+      \hbox{$\fam\TestCount%
+       \scriptstyle\kern-.045em{U}\kern-.12em{B}$}%
+    \fi}
+\fi
+%\def\SubBib{\Sub\kern-.08em\Bib}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%1996/04/20 by Shinsaku Fujita%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\ifnewl@tex
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\SubBib}{S\hbox{$\m@th$%
+   \csname S@\f@size\endcsname\fontsize\sf@size\z@
+   \math@fontsfalse\selectfont%
+   \kern-.045em{U}\kern-.12em{B}}B\hbox{$\m@th$%
+   \csname S@\f@size\endcsname\fontsize\sf@size\z@
+   \math@fontsfalse\selectfont \kern-.025em I\kern-.045em B}}
+\else \def\SubBib{\Sub\kern-.08em\Bib} \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+
+%  \begin{macro}{\La}
+%  \begin{macro}{\LaTeX}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\La{\TestCount=\fam \leavevmode L\raise.42ex
+%        \hbox{$\fam\TestCount\scriptstyle\kern-.3em A$}}
+\ifnewl@tex \else
+\def\La{\ifnum \fam=\m@ne \fam=\z@ \fi\TestCount=\fam%
+  \edef\aaa{\fontname\scriptfont\fam}%
+  \edef\bbb{\fontname\textfont\fam}\leavevmode{L}%
+  \ifx\aaa\bbb \resetfontsize%
+   \raise.46ex\hbox{{\tmpf@ntsize\bf%
+   $\fam\TestCount\kern-.4em\tmpkern{A}$}}%
+  \else%
+   \raise.42ex\hbox{$\fam\TestCount\scriptstyle\kern-.3em{A}$}%
+  \fi}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% %%%%%1996/04/20 by Shinsaku Fujita%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%\def\LaTeX{\La\kern-.15em\TeX}
+\ifnewl@tex \else \def\LaTeX{\La\kern-.15em\TeX}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\jLaTeX{\leavevmode\lower.46ex\hbox{J}\kern-.08em\LaTeX}
+\ifnewl@tex 
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\jLaTeX}%
+ {\leavevmode\lower.46ex\hbox{J}\kern-.08em\LaTeX}
+\else
+ \def\jLaTeX{\leavevmode\lower.46ex\hbox{J}\kern-.08em\LaTeX}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\PiC}
+%  \begin{macro}{\PiCTeX}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PiC{P\kern-.12em\lower.5ex\hbox{I}\kern-.075emC}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\PiCTeX{\PiC\kern-.11em\TeX}
+\ifnewl@tex 
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\PiCTeX}{\PiC\kern-.11em\TeX}
+\else
+\def\PiCTeX{\PiC\kern-.11em\TeX}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\tpic}
+%  \begin{macro}{\PiCTeX}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\tpic{\TestCount=\fam \leavevmode T%
+% \hbox{$\fam\TestCount\scriptstyle
+%\kern-.025em P\kern-.025em I\kern-.025emC$}}
+\ifnewl@tex 
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\tpic}{T\hbox{$\m@th$%
+   \csname S@\f@size\endcsname\fontsize\sf@size\z@
+   \math@fontsfalse\selectfont
+   \kern-.025em P\kern-.025em I\kern-.025emC}}
+\else
+\def\tpic{\ifnum \fam=\m@ne \fam=\z@ \fi%
+    \TestCount=\fam \leavevmode%
+    \edef\aaa{\fontname\scriptfont\fam}%
+    \edef\bbb{\fontname\textfont\fam}%
+ \resetfontsize\hbox{$\fam=\TestCount\textstyle T$}%
+ \ifx\aaa\bbb\hbox{\tmpf@ntsize\bf$\fam=\TestCount%
+        \kern-.025em P\kern-.025em I\kern-.025emC$}\else%
+ \hbox{$\fam\TestCount\scriptstyle%
+       \kern-.025em P\kern-.025em I\kern-.025emC$}\fi}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\Post}
+%  \begin{macro}{\Script}
+%  \begin{macro}{\PostScript}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifnewl@tex \else
+\def\Post{\ifnum \fam=\m@ne \fam=\z@ \fi%
+    \TestCount=\fam\leavevmode%
+    \edef\aaa{\fontname\scriptfont\fam}%
+    \edef\bbb{\fontname\textfont\fam}%
+ \resetfontsize%
+ \hbox{$\fam=\TestCount\textstyle P$}%
+ \ifx\aaa\bbb% 
+   \hbox{\tmpf@ntsize\bf%
+   $\fam=\TestCount\kern-.045em O\kern-.015em ST$}%
+ \else%
+   \hbox{$\fam\TestCount%
+   \scriptstyle\kern-.045em O\kern-.015em ST$}%
+ \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Script{\ifnum \fam=\m@ne \fam=\z@ \fi%
+    \TestCount=\fam\leavevmode%
+    \edef\aaa{\fontname\scriptfont\fam}%
+    \edef\bbb{\fontname\textfont\fam}%
+ \resetfontsize%
+ \hbox{$\fam=\TestCount\textstyle S$}%
+ \ifx\aaa\bbb% 
+   \hbox{\tmpf@ntsize\bf$\fam=\TestCount\kern-.035em %
+    C\kern-.015em R\kern-.015em IP\kern-.035em T$}%
+ \else%
+   \hbox{$\fam\TestCount\scriptstyle\kern-.035em %
+   C\kern-.015em R\kern-.015em IP\kern-.035em T$}%
+ \fi}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\PostScript{\Post\Script}
+% %%%%%1996/04/20 by Shinsaku Fujita%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\ifnewl@tex 
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\PostScript}{P\hbox{$\m@th$%
+    \csname S@\f@size\endcsname\fontsize\sf@size\z@
+    \math@fontsfalse\selectfont
+    \kern-.045em O\kern-.015em ST}S\hbox{$\m@th$%
+    \csname S@\f@size\endcsname\fontsize\sf@size\z@
+    \math@fontsfalse\selectfont
+    \kern-.035em C\kern-.015em R\kern-.015em IP\kern-.035em T}}
+\else
+\def\PostScript{\Post\Script}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Double and triple bonds}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\triplebond}
+%  \begin{macro}{\doublebond}
+%  \begin{macro}{\tbond}
+%  \begin{macro}{\dbond}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% *****************
+% * 二重 三重結合 *
+% *****************
+\def\triplebond{\leavevmode\kern.2pt\raisebox{.2ex}{%
+\hbox{\vbox{\hrule height.03ex width1em\kern.4ex
+\hrule height.03ex width1em\kern.4ex
+\hrule height.03ex width1em}}}\hskip.4pt}
+\def\doublebond{\leavevmode\kern.2pt\raisebox{.3ex}{%
+\hbox{\vbox{\hrule height.03ex width1em\kern.6ex
+\hrule height.03ex width1em}}}\hskip.4pt}
+\let\tbond=\triplebond
+\let\dbond=\doublebond
+%</chemist>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+% \Finale
+\endinput
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/chemstr.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/chemstr.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0bab3fdb3ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/chemstr.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,8567 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment

+%% File: chemstr.dtx

+%

+%  Copyright 1993,1996,1998 by Shinsaku Fujita

+%

+%  This file is part of XyMTeX system.

+%  -------------------------------------

+%

+% This file is a successor to:

+%

+% chemstr.sty

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.00}

+% \typeout{       -- Released December 1, 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita}

+% Copyright (C) 1993 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.

+%

+% This file is a part of the macro package ``XyMTeX'' which has been 

+% designed for typesetting chemical structural formulas.

+%

+% This file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which is 

+% an input directory for TeX. It is a LaTeX optional style file and 

+% should be used only within LaTeX, because several macros of the file 

+% are based on LaTeX commands. 

+%

+% For the review of XyMTeX, see

+%  (1)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``Typesetting structural formulas with the text

+%    formatter TeX/LaTeX'', Computers and Chemistry, in press.    

+% The following book deals with an application of TeX/LaTeX to 

+% preparation of manuscripts of chemical fields:

+%  (2)  Shinsaku Fujita, ``LaTeX for Chemists and Biochemists'' 

+%    Tokyo Kagaku Dozin, Tokyo (1993) [in Japanese].  

+%

+% Copying of this file is authorized only if either

+%  (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name and 

+%     directory name; or

+%  (2) if you do make changes, 

+%     (a) you name it something other than the names included in the 

+%         ``xymtex'' directory and 

+%     (b) you are requested to leave this notice intact.

+% This restriction ensures that all standard styles are identical.

+%

+% Please report any bugs, comments, suggestions, etc. to:

+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 

+%   Ashigara Research Laboratories, Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., 

+%   Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa-ken, 250-01, Japan.

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%

+% Bug Fix:

+%   1993/11/14 S. Fujita 

+%     A and B are interchanged.

+%     a and b are interchanged.

+%

+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}

+% \def\versi@ndate{December 01, 1993}

+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.00}

+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF}% % Shinsaku Fujita

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%

+% \typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 1.01}

+% \typeout{       -- Released August 16, 1996 by Shinsaku Fujita}

+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}

+% \def\versi@ndate{August 16, 1996}

+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.01}

+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita

+%

+% New address:

+%   Shinsaku Fujita, 

+%   Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, 

+%   Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\

+%   Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606 Japan

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% \def\j@urnalname{chemstr}

+% \def\versi@ndate{October 31, 1998}

+% \def\versi@nno{ver1.02}

+% \def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%

+% \fi

+%

+% \CheckSum{13300}

+%% \CharacterTable

+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z

+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z

+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9

+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#

+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&

+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)

+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,

+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/

+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<

+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?

+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\

+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_

+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|

+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}

+%

+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}

+%

+% \StopEventually{}

+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}

+%

+% \iffalse

+% \changes{v1.01}{1996/06/26}{first edition for LaTeX2e}

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{revised edition for LaTeX2e}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{enhanced edition for LaTeX2e}

+% \fi

+%

+% \iffalse

+%<*driver>

+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}

+% \fi

+\ProvidesFile{chemstr.dtx}[1998/12/25 v2.00 XyMTeX{} package file]

+% \iffalse

+\documentclass{ltxdoc}

+\GetFileInfo{chemstr.dtx}

+%

+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%

+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}

+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%

+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}

+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\title{Basic Commands for Drawing  Chemical Structures 

+by {\sffamily chemstr.sty} 

+(\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}

+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\ 

+Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, \\

+Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\

+Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606 Japan

+% % (old address)

+% % Ashigara Research Laboratories, 

+% % Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., \\ 

+% % Minami-Ashigara, Kanagawa, 250-01 Japan

+}

+\date{\filedate}

+%

+\begin{document}

+   \maketitle

+   \DocInput{chemstr.dtx}

+\end{document}

+%</driver>

+% \fi

+%

+% \section{Introduction}\label{chemstr:intro}

+%

+% \subsection{Options for {\sffamily docstrip}}

+%

+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}

+% \begin{center}

+% \begin{tabular}{|l|l|}

+% \hline

+% \emph{option} & \emph{function}\\ \hline

+% chemstr & chemstr.sty \\

+% driver & driver for this dtx file \\

+% \hline

+% \end{tabular}

+% \end{center}

+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}

+%

+% \subsection{Version Information}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+%<*chemstr>

+\typeout{XyMTeX for Drawing Chemical Structural Formulas. Version 2.00}

+\typeout{       -- Released December 25, 1998 by Shinsaku Fujita}

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\def\j@urnalname{chemstr}

+\def\versi@ndate{December 25, 1998}

+\def\versi@nno{ver2.00}

+\def\copyrighth@lder{SF} % Shinsaku Fujita

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\typeout{XyMTeX Macro File `\j@urnalname' (\versi@nno) <\versi@ndate>%

+\space[\copyrighth@lder]}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+% \section{List of commands for chemstr.sty}

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+% *********************************

+% * chemstr.sty: list of commands *

+% *********************************

+%

+%  <For separating an augument list to each argument>

+%

+%     \@forsemicol

+%     \@forl@@p

+%     \@iforl@@p

+%     \@m@mb@r

+%     \twoch@r

+%     \twoCH@R (terminater //)

+%     \twoch@@r

+%     \twoCH@@R (terminater //)

+%     \threech@r

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%  <Convention>

+%

+%     \rmoiety

+%     \lmoiety

+%     \putlatom

+%     \putratom

+%     \putlratom

+%     \Putlratom

+%  

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%  <Treatment of substitution positions>

+%

+%     \if@clip  \@clipfalse  \@cliptrue

+%     \if@aclip \@aclipfalse \@acliptrue

+%     \if@bclip \@bclipfalse \@bcliptrue

+%     \if@cclip \@cclipfalse \@ccliptrue

+%     \if@eclip \@eclipfalse \@ecliptrue

+%     \if@fclip \@fclipfalse \@fcliptrue

+%     \iforigpt \origptfalse \origpttrue

+%     \@tmpaa (counter)

+%

+%  <Structures as substituents>

+%     \@yl

+%     \yl@xdiff \yl@ydiff

+%     \yl@shiftii

+%     \yl@shifti

+%     \@ylii

+%     \@yli

+%     \@@ylii

+%     \@@yli

+%

+%  <Fused positions check>

+%     \fuseAx \fuseAy

+%     \fuseBx \fuseBy

+%

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%  <VERTICAL SETTING>

+%   Substitution 

+%

+%     \@substa

+%     \@substb

+%     \@substc

+%     \@substd

+%     \@subste

+%     \@substf

+%

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%   Setting of atoms and bonds 

+%

+%     \setsixringv      (on a vertical six-membered ring)

+%     \setdecaringv     (on a decaline (six-six) ring)

+%     \setfusedbond     (at fused bond positions)

+%     \if@clipfuse \@clipfusefalse \@clipfusetrue

+%     \setatombond      (at an appropiate position)

+%

+%   Placing structures as substituents

+%     \ylposition

+%     \ylfusedpostion

+%     \ylatombondposition

+%

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%  <HORIZONTAL SETTING>

+%   Substitution

+%

+%     \@hsubsta

+%     \@hsubstb

+%     \@hsubstc

+%     \@hsubstd

+%     \@hsubste

+%     \@hsubstf

+%

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%   Setting of atoms and bonds 

+%

+%     \setsixringh       (on a horizontal six-membered ring)

+%

+%   Placing structures as substituents

+%

+%     \ylpositionh

+%

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%  <Linking unit>

+%

+%     \ryl       (right linking unit) 

+%     \lyl       (left linking unit)

+%

+%  <Setting fused rings>

+%

+%     \set@fusionadd@sixv     \set@fusion@sixv

+%     \set@fusionadd@sixvi    \set@fusion@sixvi

+%     \set@fusionadd@sixh     \set@fusion@sixh

+%     \set@fusionadd@sixhi    \set@fusion@sixhi

+%

+%     \set@fusion@decav

+%     \set@fusion@decavb

+%     \set@fusion@decavt

+%     \set@fusion@decah

+%

+%     \set@fusion@hanthrav

+%     \set@fusion@hphenanv

+%

+%     \set@fusionadd@fivev     \set@fusion@fivev

+%     \set@fusionadd@fivevi    \set@fusion@fivevi

+%     \set@fusionadd@fiveh     \set@fusion@fiveh

+%     \set@fusionadd@fivehi    \set@fusion@fivehi

+%

+%     \set@fusion@nonav        \set@fusion@nonavi

+%     \set@fusion@nonah        \set@fusion@nonahi

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% \section{Initialization and conventions}

+% \subsection{Logos}

+%

+% The logo of \XyMTeX{} is defined in two ways.  The first definition uses 

+% the \verb/\fam/ command, which sometimes shows unusual behavior. The 

+% second definition is adopted in the present version of \XyMTeX{}, since 

+% this aims at the compatibility to \LaTeXe{}. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\XyMTeX}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% ***************

+% * XyMTeX Logo *

+% ***************

+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 1%%%

+%\newcount\TestCount

+%\def\XyM{\ifnum\fam=-1\relax\fam=0\relax\fi\TestCount=\fam%

+%X\kern-.30em\smash{\raise.50ex\hbox{$\fam\TestCount\Upsilon$}}%

+%\kern-.30em{M}}

+%\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %%XyMTeX Logo: Definition 2%%%

+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}

+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}

+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Macros for treating argumets}

+% 

+% For separating each argument (BONDLIST, SUBSLIST or ATOMLIST) into 

+% components (descriptors), we define several useful macros. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\@forsemicol}

+% \begin{macro}{\@forl@@p}

+% \begin{macro}{\@iforl@@p}

+%

+% The macro |\@forsemicol| resembles the |\@for| macro that is 

+% the \LaTeX{} original macro; however a semicolon is used as 

+% a separating key in place of a comma.  

+%

+% \changes{v1.01}{1996/07/06}{\cs{@forsemicol}: \cs{edef}

+% to \cs{expandafter}}

+% \changes{v1.01}{1996/07/06}{\cs{@iforl@@p} replaced by 

+% a LaTeX2e-like definitiion}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% ****************************************************

+% * For separating an augument list to each argument *

+% ****************************************************

+%

+\def\@forsemicol#1:=#2\do#3{%

+%  \edef\@fortmp{#2}%1996/07/06 by S. Fujita

+   \expandafter\def\expandafter\@fortmp\expandafter{#2}%

+    \ifx\@fortmp\@empty \else%

+    \expandafter\@forl@@p#2;\@nil;\@nil\@@#1{#3}\fi}

+\long\def\@forl@@p#1;#2;#3\@@#4#5{\def#4{#1}\ifx #4\@nnil \else%

+       #5\def#4{#2}\ifx #4\@nnil \else#5\@iforl@@p #3\@@#4{#5}\fi\fi}

+\long\def\@iforl@@p#1;#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil%

+       \expandafter\@fornoop \else

+      #4\relax\expandafter\@iforl@@p\fi#2\@@#3{#4}}

+%\def\@iforl@@p#1;#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil%

+%       \let\@nextwhile=\@fornoop \else%

+%      #4\relax\let\@nextwhile=\@iforl@@p\fi\@nextwhile#2\@@#3{#4}}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+%

+% The macro |\@m@mb@r| separates a character string into to portions 

+% by using a double equality symbol (|==|) and a semicolon as delimiters. 

+% The first potion consists of a locant number and a bond modifier (stored 

+% in |\@membera|), which are further separated by the macro |\twoch@r|, 

+% |\twoch@@r| or |\threech@r|. 

+% The second potion shows a substituent (stored in |\@memberb|), 

+% which is printed by means of an appropiate command. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\@m@mb@r}

+% \begin{macro}{\twoch@r}

+% \begin{macro}{\twoch@@r}

+% \begin{macro}{\threech@r}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\@m@mb@r#1==#2;{\gdef\@membera{#1}\gdef\@memberb{#2}}

+\def\twoch@r#1#2{\gdef\@tmpa{#1}\gdef\@tmpb{#2}}

+\def\twoch@@r#1#2{\gdef\@@tmpa{#1}\gdef\@@tmpb{#2}}

+\def\threech@r#1#2#3{\gdef\@tmpa{#1}\gdef\@tmpb{#2}\gdef\@tmpc{#3}}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The following two commands are added to treat spiro fusion.

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{Added for spiro fusion}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\twoCH@R}

+% \begin{macro}{\twoCH@@R}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\twoCH@@R#1#2//{\gdef\@@tmpa{#1}\gdef\@@tmpb{#2}}

+\def\twoCH@R#1#2//{\gdef\@tmpa{#1}\gdef\@tmpb{#2}}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Conventions}

+%

+% Switches for characterizing substitution sites as 

+% left, right or left-right boxes become effective in 

+% the commands |\putlatom|, |\putratom| and |\putlratom|. 

+% They are used for warning wrong or unnecessary usages of 

+% |\lmoiety| or |\rmoiety|. 

+%

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{Switches \cs{@leftput} added}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\if@leftput}

+% \begin{macro}{\if@rightput}

+% \begin{macro}{\if@leftrightput}

+% \begin{macro}{\resetlrput}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\newif\if@rightput \@rightputfalse

+\newif\if@leftput \@leftputfalse

+\newif\if@leftrightput \@leftrightputfalse

+\def\resetlrput{\@rightputfalse\@leftputfalse

+\@leftrightputfalse}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% We can use the macro |\rmoiety| for drawing a right-hand substituent 

+% and the macro |\lmoiety| for drawing a left-hand substituent. 

+%

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{The definitions of \cs{rmoiety} and 

+% \cs{lmoiety} are changed. Warning function is added.}

+%

+% When you use a |\rmoiety| command in a left box produced by 

+% a |\putlatom| command, the warning ``Wrong |\rmoiety|'' is reported. 

+% When you use a |\lmoiety| command in a right box produced by 

+% a |\putratom| command, the warning ``Wrong |\lmoiety|'' is reported. 

+% If the ``draft'' option is effective, these cases are designated by 

+% solid squares at the corresponding positions on pages. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\rmoiety}

+% \begin{macro}{\lmoiety}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% **************

+% * Convention *

+% **************

+% %\def\rmoiety#1{#1 \hss}

+% %\def\lmoiety#1{\hss #1}

+\def\rmoiety#1{\if@leftput

+\XyMTeXWarning{Wrong \string\rmoiety\space used in a left box}%

+\hbox to0pt{%

+\hbox to0pt{\hss\vrule width\overfullrule height\overfullrule}#1\hss}%

+\else\if@rightput\XyMTeXWarning{Unnecessary \string\rmoiety\space 

+used in a right box}\hbox to0pt{#1\hss}%

+\else\if@leftrightput\hbox to0pt{#1\hss}%

+\fi\fi\fi\resetlrput}

+\def\lmoiety#1{\if@rightput

+\XyMTeXWarning{Wrong \string\lmoiety\space used in a right box}%

+\hbox to0pt{\hss#1\kern-.72em%

+\hbox to0pt{\vrule width\overfullrule height\overfullrule\hss}}\else 

+\if@leftput\XyMTeXWarning{Unnecessary \string\lmoiety\space 

+used in a left box}\hbox to0pt{\hss#1}%

+\else\if@leftrightput\hbox to0pt{\hss#1\kern-.72em}%

+\else\hbox to0pt{\hss#1\kern-.72em}\fi\fi\fi\resetlrput}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% Warnings from \XyMTeX{} are concerned with commands 

+% |\rmoiety| and |\lmoiety|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\XyMTeXWarning}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\XyMTeXWarning#1{%

+\begingroup

+ \let\protect\string

+ \immediate\write\@unused{^^IXyMTeX Warning: #1\space 

+   on input line \the\inputlineno^^I}%

+\endgroup}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% Warnings concerned with ring fusion are based on 

+% the command |\FuseWarning| of \XyMTeX{}.

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{Warning function is added.}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\@cnttempa}

+% \begin{macro}{\@cnttempb}

+% \begin{macro}{\FuseWarning}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\newcount\@cnttempa

+\newcount\@cnttempb

+\def\FuseWarning#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{%

+\@tempcnta=#1 \@tempcntb=#2

+\@cnttempa=#3 \advance\@cnttempa-#5

+\@cnttempb=#4 \advance\@cnttempb-#6

+\ifnum\@tempcnta=\@cnttempa

+ \ifnum\@tempcntb=\@cnttempb\else

+  \XyMTeXWarning{Mismatched fusion at bond `#7'}%

+ \fi

+\else

+  \XyMTeXWarning{Mismatched fusion at bond `#7'}%

+\fi}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The original \LaTeX{} command |\put| is changed into macros suitable to 

+% more specific uses as follows. 

+% 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{The definition is changed. Warning function 

+% for \cs{rmoiety} is added.}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\putlatom}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %\def\putlatom#1#2#3{\put(#1,#2){\hbox to0pt{\hss #3}}}

+\def\putlatom#1#2#3{\begingroup\resetlrput

+\put(#1,#2){\@leftputtrue\hbox to0pt{\hss #3}\@leftputfalse}\endgroup}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{The definition is changed. Warning function 

+% for \cs{lmoiety} is added.}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\putratom}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+%\def\putratom#1#2#3{\put(#1,#2){\hbox to0pt{#3 \hss}}}

+\def\putratom#1#2#3{\begingroup\resetlrput

+\put(#1,#2){\@rightputtrue\hbox to0pt{#3 \hss}\@rightputfalse}\endgroup}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{The definition is changed. Warning function 

+% for \cs{lmoiety} and \cs{rmoiety|} is added.}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\putlratom}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\putlratom#1#2#3{\begingroup\resetlrput

+\put(#1,#2){\@leftrightputtrue\hbox to.72em{#3\hss}}%

+\@leftrightputfalse\endgroup}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \changes{v1.01b}{1998/10/06}{\cs{putlratom}: delete \sc{setbox0}}

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/20}{The old definition is 

+% totally replaced by the new definition}

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+% % old definitions

+% %    \begin{macrocode}

+% % changed to avoid Overfull warnings 1993/11/11/S.Fujita

+% % \newif\if@moiety \@moietyfalse

+% % \def\putlratom#1#2#3{%

+% % \def\lmoiety##1{\global\@moietytrue}%

+% % \setbox0=\hbox{#3}%deleted by S. Fujita

+% % \if@moiety\def\lmoiety##1{\hss ##1}%

+% % \put(#1,#2){\hbox to.72em{#3}}\global\@moietyfalse

+% % \else\put(#1,#2){\hbox to.6em{#3\hss}}\fi}%

+% % \def\putlratom#1#2#3{\put(#1,#2){\hbox to.6em{#3}}}

+% %    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\Putlratom}

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\Putlratom#1#2#3{\put(#1,#2){\hbox to.8em{#3}}}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Parameters}

+%

+% The original point for drawing a structural formula is shifted to an 

+% appropriate position, which is designated by the following parmeters 

+% (counters) for coordinates.

+% 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\noshift}

+% \begin{macro}{\shifti}

+% \begin{macro}{\shiftii}

+% \begin{macro}{\shiftiii}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% *******************************

+% * Parameters for Coordinates  *

+% *******************************

+\newcount\noshift \noshift=0\relax%

+\newcount\shifti \shifti=240\relax%

+\newcount\shiftii \shiftii=400\relax%

+\newcount\shiftiii \shiftiii=800\relax%

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The unit length for \XyMTeX{} is selected to be 0.1pt. This value 

+% should not be maintained as possible as you can.  A smaller value 

+% may disapper a sloped line of short length. 

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\unitlength.1pt%

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+% Parameters for ring fusion are used in fusering.sty. 

+% \changes{v2.00}{1999/2/16}{This has been added to process the old XyMTeX 

+% manual for Version 1.01} 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\fuseAx}

+% \begin{macro}{\fuseBx}

+% \begin{macro}{\fuseAy}

+% \begin{macro}{\fuseBy}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\fuseAx{0}

+\def\fuseBx{0}

+\def\fuseAy{0}

+\def\fuseBy{0}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Various switchs}

+%

+% These macros are used for clipping spaces at substitution positions. 

+% Note that |\if@clip| is used in place of |\if@dclip|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\if@clip}

+% \begin{macro}{\if@aclip}

+% \begin{macro}{\if@bclip}

+% \begin{macro}{\if@cclip}

+% \begin{macro}{\if@eclip}

+% \begin{macro}{\if@fclip}

+% \begin{macro}{\iforigpt}

+% \begin{macro}{\@tmpaa}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% ***************************************

+% * various flags (switches)            *

+% * treatment of substitution positions *

+% ***************************************

+%

+% for 6- or lower-membered cycles

+%

+\newif\if@clip \@clipfalse%   % switch for clipping at 4 

+\newif\if@aclip \@aclipfalse% % switch for clipping at 1

+\newif\if@bclip \@bclipfalse% % switch for clipping at 2

+\newif\if@cclip \@cclipfalse% % switch for clipping at 3

+\newif\if@eclip \@eclipfalse% % switch for clipping at 5

+\newif\if@fclip \@fclipfalse% % switch for clipping at 6

+\newif\iforigpt \origptfalse% % switch for showing the original point

+\newcount\@tmpaa%

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\if@gclip}

+% \begin{macro}{\if@hclip}

+% \begin{macro}{\if@iclip}

+% \begin{macro}{\if@jclip}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+%

+% for further-membered cycles

+%

+\newif\if@gclip \@gclipfalse%

+\newif\if@hclip \@hclipfalse%

+\newif\if@iclip \@iclipfalse%

+\newif\if@jclip \@jclipfalse%

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Various commands and switchs for using substituents}

+%

+% For drawing a structure as a substituent, the argument (yl) can

+% be used.  The following commands and counters are used for shifting

+% the substituent. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Commands for setting substituents}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{Added: \cs{reset@yl@xydiff}}
+%

+% \begin{macro}{\@yl}

+% \begin{macro}{\yl@xdiff}

+% \begin{macro}{\yl@ydiff}

+% \begin{macro}{\yl@shiftii}

+% \begin{macro}{\yl@shifti}

+% \begin{macro}{\@ylii}

+% \begin{macro}{\@yli}

+% \begin{macro}{\@@ylii}

+% \begin{macro}{\@@yli}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\@yl{(yl)}

+\newcount\yl@xdiff

+\newcount\yl@ydiff

+\newcount\yl@shiftii

+\newcount\yl@shifti

+\def\@ylii{0}\def\@yli{0}

+\def\@@ylii{}\def\@@yli{}

+\def\reset@@yl{\gdef\@@ylii{}\gdef\@@yli{}}

+\def\reset@yl@xydiff{\yl@xdiff=0 \yl@ydiff=0\relax}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The following switches are used for shifting the substituent. 

+% The locant flags such as |\@ylatrue| have been stoped to use. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/11}{Delete \cs{@ylatrue} etc.}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Commands for setting substituents}
+%

+% Old definition:

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %%%%% \newif\if@yla \@ylafalse

+% %%%%% \newif\if@ylb \@ylbfalse

+% %%%%% \newif\if@ylc \@ylcfalse

+% %%%%% \newif\if@yld \@yldfalse

+% %%%%% \newif\if@yle \@ylefalse

+% %%%%% \newif\if@ylf \@ylffalse

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\if@ylsw}

+% \begin{macro}{\if@@ylsw}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\newif\if@ylsw \@ylswfalse

+\newif\if@@ylsw \@@ylswfalse

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+% Old definition:

+% %    \begin{macrocode}

+% %%%%% \def\@reset@ylsw{\@ylafalse\@ylbfalse\@ylcfalse

+% %%%%% \@yldfalse\@ylefalse\@ylffalse\@ylswfalse}

+% %    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\@reset@ylsw}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\@reset@ylsw{\@ylswfalse\@@ylswfalse}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The further fusion of a three- or four-membered ring at a center bond 

+% of a six-six or six-five ring is permitted, while that of a five- 

+% or more-membered ring is not permitted.  The macro |\@smallringsw| 

+% is used for such switching (fusering.sty). 

+% 

+% \begin{macro}{\if@smallringsw}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\newif\if@smallringsw \@smallringswfalse

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Initialization}

+%

+% The |\iniflag| command initializes all of the clipping flags. 

+% The |\iniatom| command initializes all of the strings of temporary use 

+% such as |\aaa| and |\bbb|, which are associated with respective 

+% atom positions. 

+% The |\resetbdsw| command resets all of the strings of temporary use 

+% such as |\@aaa| and |\@bbb|, which are associated with respective 

+% bond positions. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\iniflag}

+% \begin{macro}{\iniatom}

+% \begin{macro}{\resetbdsw}

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{Delete \sc{global}}
+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %\def\iniflag{%

+% %\global\@aclipfalse\global\@bclipfalse%

+% %\global\@cclipfalse\global\@clipfalse\global\@eclipfalse%

+% %\global\@fclipfalse\global\@gclipfalse\global\@hclipfalse%

+% %\global\@iclipfalse\global\@jclipfalse%

+% %\global\@clipfusefalse}%

+% %\def\iniatom{%

+% %\gdef\aaa{}\gdef\bbb{}\gdef\ccc{}\gdef\ddd{}%

+% %\gdef\eee{}\gdef\fff{}%

+% %\gdef\ggg{}\gdef\hhh{}\gdef\iii{}\gdef\jjj{}%

+% %\gdef\@aaa{}\gdef\@bbb{}\gdef\@ccc{}\gdef\@ddd{}%

+% %\gdef\@eee{}\gdef\@fff{}%

+% %}%

+% %\def\resetbdsw{\gdef\@aaa{a}\gdef\@bbb{b}\gdef\@ccc{c}%

+% %\gdef\@ddd{d}\gdef\@eee{e}\gdef\@fff{f}}%

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\iniflag{%

+\@aclipfalse\@bclipfalse\@cclipfalse\@clipfalse\@eclipfalse%

+\@fclipfalse\@gclipfalse\@hclipfalse%

+\@iclipfalse\@jclipfalse\@clipfusefalse%

+\global\@smallringswfalse%

+}%

+\def\iniatom{%

+\def\aaa{}\def\bbb{}\def\ccc{}\gdef\ddd{}%

+\def\eee{}\def\fff{}%

+\def\ggg{}\def\hhh{}\def\iii{}\gdef\jjj{}%

+\def\@aaa{}\def\@bbb{}\def\@ccc{}\def\@ddd{}%

+\def\@eee{}\def\@fff{}%

+\def\@ggg{}\def\@hhh{}\def\@iii{}%

+\def\@jjj{}\def\@kkk{}%

+}%

+\def\resetbdsw{\def\@aaa{a}\def\@bbb{b}\def\@ccc{c}%

+\def\@ddd{d}\def\@eee{e}\def\@fff{f}%

+\def\@ggg{g}\def\@hhh{h}\def\@iii{i}%

+\def\@jjj{j}\def\@kkk{k}%

+}%

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% At the beginning of \XyMTeX\ processing, we initialize atom 

+% information by the command |\iniatom|.

+% 

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\iniatom

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+%

+% \section{Macros for Vertical formulas}

+% \subsection{Placing substituents for vertical formulas}

+%

+% Such a drawing command as |\setsixringv| uses several inner macros 

+% for placing substituents with bonds. The first set of inner macros 

+% are shown as follows. 

+%

+% The command |\ylposition| is to obtain the shift values 

+% |\@ylii| and |\@yli| which are used for shifting the standard 

+% point of a substituent. 

+% The locant flags such as |\@ylatrue| have been stoped to use. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/11}{Delete \cs{@ylatrue} etc.}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Commands for setting substituents}
+%

+% \begin{macro}{\ylposition}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\ylposition#1#2#3#4#5{%

+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw

+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%

+\if@@ylsw\else%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax%

+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi

+\if@@ylsw

+\ifnum#5<0\relax%

+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%

+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax\fi

+\ifnum\@tmpaa>#3\relax%

+\ifnum\@tmpaa<#4\relax%

+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+% The flags |\@lyatrue| etc are not used in a revised edition. 

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+ \or\ifx\aaa\empty

+      \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-406}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1

+    \else

+      \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-442}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1

+    \fi

+ \or\ifx\bbb\empty

+      \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-303}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2

+    \else

+      \gdef\@ylii{-213}\gdef\@yli{-327}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2

+    \fi

+ \or\ifx\ccc\empty

+      \gdef\@ylii{-171}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3

+    \else

+      \gdef\@ylii{-213}\gdef\@yli{-79}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3

+    \fi

+ \or\ifx\ddd\empty

+      \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4

+    \else

+      \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{36}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4

+    \fi

+ \or\ifx\eee\empty

+      \gdef\@ylii{171}\gdef\@yli{-103}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5

+    \else

+      \gdef\@ylii{213}\gdef\@yli{-79}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5

+    \fi

+ \or\ifx\fff\empty

+      \gdef\@ylii{171}\gdef\@yli{-303}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6

+    \else

+      \gdef\@ylii{213}\gdef\@yli{-327}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6

+    \fi%

+\fi%end of ifcase

+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The |\@substa| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 

+% the 1-position (top) of a vertical six-membered ring.  The bond linking 

+% between the substituent and the 1-position is drawn in the light of 

+% the corresponding bond modifier (|\@tmpc| = Sa, Sb, SA, SB etc.). 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{New bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, and Sd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@substa}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % subst. on 1 %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\def\@substa{%

+\if@aclip% %clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \put(0,436){\line(0,1){110}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax

+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-18,436){\line(-3,5){60}}%    % single bond at 1

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax

+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(18,436){\line(3,5){60}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(18,436)(72,526)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=36\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax

+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(18,436){\line(3,5){60}}%    % single bond at 1

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax

+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-18,436){\line(-3,5){60}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-18,436)(-72,526)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax

+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+           \put(-18,436){\line(-3,5){60}}%    % single bond at 1

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-27\relax

+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           \put(18,436){\line(3,5){60}}%      % single bond at 1

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           \put(-12,436){\line(0,1){110}}%    % double bond at 1

+           \put(12,436){\line(0,1){110}}%     % double bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,436){\line(0,1){110}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+             \put(0,436){\line(0,1){110}}%    % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,436)(0,546)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(0,406){\setatombondd}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(0,406){\setatombondf}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           \put(0,436){\line(0,1){110}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi%

+\else% % no clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \put(0,406){\line(0,1){140}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax

+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,406){\line(-3,5){72}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax

+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,406){\line(3,5){72}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,406)(72,526)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) upper --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=30\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax

+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,406){\line(3,5){72}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax

+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,406){\line(-3,5){72}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,406)(-72,526)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax

+           \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+           \put(0,406){\line(-3,5){72}}%      % single bond at 1

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-37\relax

+           \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           \put(0,406){\line(3,5){72}}%       % single bond at 1

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi%

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           \put(-12,406){\line(0,1){140}}%    % double bond at 1

+           \put(12,406){\line(0,1){140}}%     % double bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,406){\line(0,1){140}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+             \put(0,406){\line(0,1){140}}%    % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,406)(0,546)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(0,406){\setatombondd}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(0,406){\setatombondf}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           \put(0,406){\line(0,1){140}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi

+ \fi}% end of \@substa

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The |\@substb| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 

+% the 2-position (upper-right) of a vertical six-membered ring. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{New bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, and Sd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@substb}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % subst. on 2 %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\def\@substb{%

+ \if@bclip %clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax

+           \putratom{311}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(201,327){\line(5,3){100}}%    % single bond at 2

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax

+           \putratom{268}{420}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(201,358){\line(3,5){60}}%     % single bond at 2

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax

+           \putratom{318}{280}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(201,303){\line(1,0){100}}%    % single bond at 2

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(201,303)(301,303)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax

+           \putratom{318}{280}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(201,303){\line(1,0){100}}%    % single bond at 2

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax

+            \putratom{268}{420}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(201,358){\line(3,5){60}}%     % single bond at 2

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(201,358)(261,458)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax

+           \putratom{268}{420}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(201,358){\line(3,5){60}}%     % single bond at 2

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha%

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax

+           \putratom{318}{280}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(201,303){\line(1,0){100}}%    % single bond at 2

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi%

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=18\relax

+           \putratom{311}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(194,331){\line(5,3){100}}%    % double bond at 2

+           \put(200,305){\line(5,3){100}}%    % double bond at 2

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax

+           \putratom{311}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(201,327){\line(5,3){100}}%    % single bond at 2

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax

+           \putratom{311}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(201,327){\line(5,3){100}}%    % single bond at 2

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(201,327)(301,387)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(171,303){\setatombonda}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(171,303){\setatombonde}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax

+           \putratom{311}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(201,327){\line(5,3){100}}%    % single bond at 2

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi%

+ \else% %no clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax

+           \putratom{301}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(171,303){\line(5,3){120}}%    % single bond at 2

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-15\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=13\relax

+           \putratom{258}{410}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(171,303){\line(3,5){72}}%     % single bond at 2

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax

+           \putratom{318}{280}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(171,303){\line(1,0){140}}%    % single bond at 2

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(171,303)(311,303)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax

+           \putratom{318}{280}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(171,303){\line(1,0){140}}%     % single bond at 2

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-15\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=13\relax

+           \putratom{258}{410}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(171,303){\line(3,5){72}}%     % single bond at 2

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(171,303)(243,423)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-15\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=13\relax

+           \putratom{258}{410}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(171,303){\line(3,5){72}}%     % single bond at 2

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax

+           \putratom{318}{280}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(171,303){\line(1,0){140}}%    % single bond at 2

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi%

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=6\relax

+           \putratom{301}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(168,310){\line(5,3){120}}%    % double bond at 2

+           \put(174,284){\line(5,3){120}}%    % double bond at 2

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax

+           \putratom{301}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(171,303){\line(5,3){120}}%    % single bond at 2

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax

+           \putratom{301}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(171,303){\line(5,3){120}}%    % single bond at 2

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(171,303)(291,375)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(171,303){\setatombonda}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(171,303){\setatombonde}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax

+           \putratom{301}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(171,303){\line(5,3){120}}%    % single bond at 2

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi

+ \fi}% end of \@substb

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The |\@substc| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 

+% the 3-position (lower-right) of a vertical six-membered ring. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff|} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{New bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, and Sd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@substc}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % subst. on 3 %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\def\@substc{%

+ \if@cclip %clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax

+           \putratom{311}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(201,79){\line(5,-3){110}}%    % single bond at 3

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax

+           \putratom{268}{-80}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(201,48){\line(3,-5){60}}%     % single bond at 3

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax

+           \putratom{318}{74}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(201,103){\line(1,0){100}}%    % single bond at 3

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(201,103)(301,103)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax

+           \putratom{318}{74}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(201,103){\line(1,0){100}}%    % single bond at 3

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax

+           \putratom{268}{-80}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(201,48){\line(3,-5){60}}%     % single bond at 3

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(201,48)(261,-52)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-7\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax

+           \putratom{268}{-80}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(201,48){\line(3,-5){60}}%     % single bond at 3

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax

+           \putratom{318}{74}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           \put(201,103){\line(1,0){100}}%    % single bond at 3

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=52\relax

+           \putratom{311}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(194,76){\line(5,-3){100}}%    % double bond at 3

+           \put(200,101){\line(5,-3){100}}%   % double bond at 3

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax

+           \putratom{311}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(201,79){\line(5,-3){100}}%    % single bond at 3

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax

+           \putratom{311}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(201,79){\line(5,-3){100}}%    % single bond at 3

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(201,79)(301,19)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(171,103){\setatombondf}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(171,103){\setatombondc}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax

+           \putratom{311}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(201,79){\line(5,-3){100}}%    % single bond at 3

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi%

+ \else%no clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax

+           \putratom{301}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(171,103){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % single bond at 3

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=48\relax

+           \putratom{258}{-70}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(171,103){\line(3,-5){72}}%    % single bond at 3

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax

+           \putratom{318}{74}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(171,103){\line(1,0){140}}%    % single bond at 3

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(171,103)(311,103)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax

+           \putratom{318}{74}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(171,103){\line(1,0){140}}%    % single bond at 3

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=48\relax

+           \putratom{258}{-70}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(171,103){\line(3,-5){72}}%    % single bond at 3

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(171,103)(243,-17)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=48\relax

+           \putratom{258}{-70}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(171,103){\line(3,-5){72}}%    % single bond at 3

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax

+           \putratom{318}{74}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           \put(171,103){\line(1,0){140}}%    % single bond at 3

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=65\relax

+           \putratom{301}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(168,96){\line(5,-3){120}}%    % double bond at 3

+           \put(174,121){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % double bond at 3

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax

+           \putratom{301}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(171,103){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % single bond at 3

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax

+           \putratom{301}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(171,103){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % single bond at 3

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(171,103)(291,31)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(171,103){\setatombondf}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(171,103){\setatombondc}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax

+           \putratom{301}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+     \put(171,103){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % single bond at 3

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi

+ \fi

+}% end of \@substc

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The |\@substd| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 

+% the 4-position (bottom) of a vertical six-membered ring. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{New bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, and Sd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@substd}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % subst. on 4 %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\def\@substd{%

+\if@clip %clipping

+    \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+            \put(0,-30){\line(0,-1){110}}%    % single bond at 4

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax

+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-18,-30){\line(-3,-5){60}}%   % single bond at 4

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax

+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(18,-30){\line(3,-5){60}}%     % single bond at 4

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(18,-30)(72,-120)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax

+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(18,-30){\line(3,-5){60}}%     % single bond at 4

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax

+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-18,-30){\line(-3,-5){60}}%   % single bond at 4

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-18,-30)(-78,-130)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-36\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax

+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-18,-30){\line(-3,-5){60}}%   % single bond at 4

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=100\relax

+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(18,-30){\line(3,-5){60}}%     % single bond at 4

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+           \put(-12,-30){\line(0,-1){110}}%   % double bond at 4

+           \put(12,-30){\line(0,-1){110}}%    % double bond at 4

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,-30){\line(0,-1){110}}%    % single bond at 4

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,-30){\line(0,-1){110}}%     % single bond at 4

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,-30)(0,-140)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(0,0){\setatombonde}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(0,0){\setatombondg}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+           \put(0,-30){\line(0,-1){110}}%     % single bond at 4

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi%

+ \else%no clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+            \put(0,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%      % single bond at 4

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax

+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-3,-5){72}}%       % single bond at 4

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax

+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(3,-5){72}}%        % single bond at 4

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(72,-120)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax

+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(3,-5){72}}%        % single bond at 4

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax

+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-3,-5){72}}%       % single bond at 4

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(-72,-120)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax

+           \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(0,0){\line(-3,-5){72}}%       % single bond at 4

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=110\relax

+           \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(0,0){\line(3,-5){72}}%        % single bond at 4

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi%

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+           \put(-12,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%     % double bond at 4

+           \put(12,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%      % double bond at 4

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%       % single bond at 4

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%      % single bond at 4

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(0,-140)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(0,0){\setatombonde}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(0,0){\setatombondg}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+           \put(0,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%       % single bond at 4

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi%

+ \fi}%end of \@substd

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The |\@subste| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 

+% the 5-position (lower-left) of a vertical six-membered ring. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{New bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, and Sd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@subste}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % subst. on 5 %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\def\@subste{%

+ \if@eclip%clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax

+           \putlatom{-311}{-27}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-201,79){\line(-5,-3){110}}%  % single bond at 5

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=7\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax

+           \putlatom{-268}{-80}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-201,48){\line(-3,-5){60}}%   % single bond at 5

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax

+           \putlatom{-318}{74}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-201,103){\line(-1,0){100}}%  % single bond at 5

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-201,103)(-301,103)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u% (u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax

+           \putlatom{-318}{74}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-201,103){\line(-1,0){100}}%  % single bond at 5

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d% (d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=7\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax

+           \putlatom{-268}{-80}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-201,48){\line(-3,-5){60}}%   % single bond at 5

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-201,48)(-261,-52)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=7\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax

+           \putlatom{-268}{-80}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-201,48){\line(-3,-5){60}}%   % single bond at 5

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax

+           \putlatom{-318}{74}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+           \put(-201,103){\line(-1,0){100}}%  % single bond at 5

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi%

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=62\relax

+           \putlatom{-311}{-27}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-194,76){\line(-5,-3){100}}%  % double bond at 5

+           \put(-200,101){\line(-5,-3){100}}% % double bond at 5

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax

+           \putlatom{-311}{-27}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-201,79){\line(-5,-3){100}}%  % single bond at 5

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax

+           \putlatom{-311}{-27}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-201,79){\line(-5,-3){100}}%  % single bond at 5

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-201,79)(-301,21)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(-171,103){\setatombondc}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(-171,103){\setatombondd}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=46\relax

+           \putlatom{-311}{-27}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-201,79){\line(-5,-3){100}}%  % single bond at 5

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi%

+\else%no clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=56\relax

+           \putlatom{-301}{-27}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-171,103){\line(-5,-3){120}}% % single bond at 5

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=63\relax

+           \putlatom{-258}{-70}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-171,103){\line(-3,-5){72}}%  % single bond at 5

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax

+           \putlatom{-326}{74}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-171,103){\line(-1,0){140}}%  % single bond at 5

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-171,103)(-311,103)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax

+           \putlatom{-326}{74}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-171,103){\line(-1,0){140}}%  % single bond at 5

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=63\relax

+           \putlatom{-258}{-70}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-171,103){\line(-3,-5){72}}%  % single bond at 5

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-171,103)(-243,-17)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=63\relax

+           \putlatom{-258}{-70}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-171,103){\line(-3,-5){72}}%  % single bond at 5

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=29\relax

+           \putlatom{-326}{74}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+           \put(-171,103){\line(-1,0){140}}%  % single bond at 5

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=62\relax

+           \putlatom{-301}{-27}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-168,96){\line(-5,-3){120}}%  % double bond at 5

+           \put(-174,121){\line(-5,-3){120}}% % double bond at 5

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=56\relax

+            \putlatom{-301}{-27}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-171,103){\line(-5,-3){120}}% % single bond at 5

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=56\relax

+            \putlatom{-301}{-27}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-171,103){\line(-5,-3){120}}% % single bond at 5

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-171,103)(-311,31)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(-171,103){\setatombondc}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(-171,103){\setatombondd}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=56\relax

+            \putlatom{-301}{-27}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+            \put(-171,103){\line(-5,-3){120}}%% single bond at 5

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi%

+ \fi}% end of \@subste

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The |\@substf| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 

+% the 6-position (upper-left) of a vertical six-membered ring. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{New bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, and Sd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@substf}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % subst. on 6 %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\def\@substf{%

+ \if@fclip %clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax

+           \putlatom{-311}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-201,327){\line(-5,3){100}}%  % single bond at 6

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=8\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax

+           \putlatom{-268}{420}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-201,358){\line(-3,5){60}}%   % single bond at 6

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax

+           \putlatom{-318}{280}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-201,303){\line(-1,0){100}}%  % single bond at 6

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-201,303)(-301,303)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax

+           \putlatom{-318}{280}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-201,303){\line(-1,0){100}}%  % single bond at 6

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=8\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax

+           \putlatom{-268}{420}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-201,358){\line(-3,5){60}}%   % single bond at 6

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-201,358)(-261,458)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=8\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=38\relax

+           \putlatom{-268}{420}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-201,358){\line(-3,5){60}}%   % single bond at 6

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax

+           \putlatom{-318}{280}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-201,303){\line(-1,0){100}}%  % single bond at 6

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=6\relax

+           \putlatom{-311}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-194,331){\line(-5,3){100}}%  % double bond at 6

+           \put(-200,305){\line(-5,3){100}}%  % double bond at 6

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax

+           \putlatom{-311}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-201,327){\line(-5,3){100}}%  % single bond at 6

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax

+           \putlatom{-311}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-201,327){\line(-5,3){100}}%  % single bond at 6

+           }{{\thicklines%

+%              \dottedline{20}(-201,327)(-301,375)}}%

+              \dottedline{20}(-201,327)(-301,387)}}%1998/10/11 by SF

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(-171,303){\setatombondg}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(-171,303){\setatombonda}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=24\relax

+           \putlatom{-311}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-201,327){\line(-5,3){100}}%  % single bond at 6

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi

+\else%no clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax

+           \putlatom{-301}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-171,303){\line(-5,3){120}}%  % single bond at 6

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=13\relax

+           \putlatom{-258}{410}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-171,303){\line(-3,5){72}}%   % single bond at 6

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax

+           \putlatom{-326}{280}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-171,303){\line(-1,0){140}}%  % single bond at 6

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-171,303)(-311,303)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax

+           \putlatom{-326}{280}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-171,303){\line(-1,0){140}}%  % single bond at 6

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=13\relax

+           \putlatom{-258}{410}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-171,303){\line(-3,5){72}}%   % single bond at 6

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-171,303)(-243,423)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=13\relax

+           \putlatom{-258}{410}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-171,303){\line(-3,5){72}}%   % single bond at 6

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=15\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=23\relax

+           \putlatom{-326}{280}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-171,303){\line(-1,0){140}}%  % single bond at 6

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi%

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=6\relax

+           \putlatom{-301}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-168,310){\line(-5,3){120}}%  % double bond at 6

+           \put(-174,284){\line(-5,3){120}}%  % double bond at 6

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax

+           \putlatom{-301}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-171,303){\line(-5,3){120}}%  % single bond at 6

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax

+           \putlatom{-301}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-171,303){\line(-5,3){120}}%  % single bond at 6

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-171,303)(-311,375)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(-171,303){\setatombondg}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(-171,303){\setatombonda}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax

+           \putlatom{-301}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-171,303){\line(-5,3){120}}%  % single bond at 6

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi

+\fi}% end of \@substf

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Setting-up substituents and bonds on a six-membered ring}

+%

+% The |\setsixringv| takes 5 arguments. 

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+% **************************************************************

+% * setting of atoms and bonds on a vertical six-membered ring *

+% **************************************************************

+%

+%    \setsixringv{SUBSLIST}{AD}{LOWER}{UPPER}{ORDER}

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% The first argument |SUBSLIST| is a list of substituents, which is 

+% represented in the standard format of \XyMTeX{}. 

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 6 substitution positions)

+%

+%       for n = 1 to 6 

+%

+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom

+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom

+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom

+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom

+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)

+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)

+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom

+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom

+%

+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 

+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 

+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 

+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 

+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 

+%                           for ring fusion 

+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 

+%                           for ring fusion 

+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 

+%                           for the other ring fusion 

+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 

+%                           for the other ring fusion 

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% The second argument |AD| is an adjustment value, which adjusts the original 

+% set of locant numbers into the standard one between 1 to 6 for drawing 

+% a six-membered ring. 

+% The effective range of the standared set of locant numbers is 

+% restricted by the auguments |LOWER| and |UPPER|.  A minus value of 

+% the last argument shows the anti-clockwise numbering, while zero or 

+% a plus value represents the clockwise numbering. 

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%

+%    AD       : adjustment      e.g. 0 for six-membered rings

+%    LOWER    : lower limit     LOWER < effective range < UPPER

+%    UPPER    : upper limit

+%    ORDER     : >= 0 clockwise, <0 anti-clockwise

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding switches \cs{@yla} etc.}
+%

+% \begin{macro}{\setsixringv}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setsixringv#1#2#3#4#5{%

+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%

+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else

+\ifnum#5 < 0\relax%

+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%

+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax \fi

+\ifnum\@tmpaa >#3\relax%

+\ifnum\@tmpaa <#4\relax%

+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+% The following commands are not used in a revised version

+% because of the direct use of |\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else...\fi|.

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %\or \if@yla\else\@substa\fi% subst. on 1

+% %\or \if@ylb\else\@substb\fi% subst. on 2

+% %\or \if@ylc\else\@substc\fi% subst. on 3

+% %\or \if@yld\else\@substd\fi% subst. on 4

+% %\or \if@yle\else\@subste\fi% subst. on 5

+% %\or \if@ylf\else\@substf\fi% subst. on 6

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+ \or\@substa% subst. on 1

+ \or\@substb% subst. on 2

+ \or\@substc% subst. on 3

+ \or\@substd% subst. on 4

+ \or\@subste% subst. on 5

+ \or\@substf% subst. on 6

+\fi%end of ifcase

+\fi%

+\fi\fi\fi}}%

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Setting-up substituents and bonds on a decaline ring}

+%

+% The command |\setdecaringv| 

+% has been stopped to use and replaced by % |\setsixringv|

+% (version 1.02). 

+%

+% The |\setdecaringv| takes 5 arguments. 

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+% ***********************************************************

+% * setting of atoms and bonds on a decaline (six-six) ring *

+% ***********************************************************

+%

+%   \setdecaringv{SUBSLIST}{AD}{LOWER}{UPPER}{ORDER}

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% The first argument |SUBSLIST| is a list of substituents, which is 

+% represented in the standard format of \XyMTeX{}. 

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%

+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 8 substitution positions)

+%

+%       for n = 1 to 8 

+%

+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom

+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom

+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom

+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom

+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)

+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)

+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom

+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom

+%

+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 

+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 

+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 

+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 

+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 

+%                           for ring fusion 

+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 

+%                           for ring fusion 

+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 

+%                           for the other ring fusion 

+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 

+%                           for the other ring fusion 

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% Substituents at the fused positions are designated by 

+% the number 0 and the following bond modifiers.  

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%        for 0 (fused positions)

+%

+%           0FA        :  alpha single bond at 8a 

+%           0FB        :  beta single bond at 8a

+%           0FU        :  unspecified single bond at 8a

+%           0GA        :  alpha single bond at 4a 

+%           0GB        :  beta single bond at 4a

+%           0GU        :  unspecified single bond at 4a

+%

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% The second argument |AD| is an adjustment value, which adjusts the original 

+% set of locant numbers into the standard one between 0 to 8 for drawing 

+% a decaline (six-six fused) ring. 

+% The effective range of the standared set of locant numbers is 

+% restricted by the auguments |LOWER| and |UPPER|.  A minus value of 

+% the last argument shows the anti-clockwise numbering, while zero or 

+% a plus value represents the clockwise numbering. 

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%    AD       : adjustment      e.g. 0 for six-membered rings

+%    LOWER    : lower limit     LOWER < effective range < UPPER

+%    UPPER    : upper limit

+%    ORDER    : >= 0 clockwise, <0 anti-clockwise

+%

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+% (Deleted)

+% % \begin{macro}{\setdecaringv}

+% %    \begin{macrocode}

+% \def\setdecaringv#1#2#3#4#5{%

+% \@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+% \expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%

+% \ifnum#5 <0\relax%

+% \@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax\advance\@tmpaa by #2\relax%

+% \else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax\advance\@tmpaa by #2\relax\fi%

+% \ifnum\@tmpaa >#3\relax%

+% \ifnum\@tmpaa <#4\relax%

+% %    \end{macrocode}

+% %

+% %    \begin{macrocode}

+% \ifcase\@tmpaa%

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % 0 fused positions

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 

+%  \if\@tmpb F%single bond at 8a (fused position)

+%    \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond at 8a (fused position)

+%            \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(171,303){\line(0,1){140}}%    % single bond at 8a

+%            }%

+%    \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond at 8a (fused position)

+%            \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+%            \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%              \put(171,303){\line(0,1){140}}%  % single bond at 8a

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(171,303)(171,443)}}%

+%    \else\if\@tmpc U%beta single bond at 8a (fused position)

+%            \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+%            \put(168,303){$\wr$}% unspecified single bond at 4a

+%            \put(168,353){$\wr$}%

+%            \put(168,403){$\wr$}%

+%    \else\if\@tmpc S%beta single bond at 8a (fused position)

+%            \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+%              \put(171,303){\line(0,1){140}}%  % single bond at 8a

+%    \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%beta single bond at 8a (fused position)

+%            \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+%              \put(171,303){\line(0,1){140}}%  % single bond at 8a

+%    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+%  \else\if\@tmpb G%single bond at 4a (fused position)

+%    \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond at 4a (fused position)

+%            \putlratom{140}{-127}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(171,103){\line(0,-1){140}}%   % single bond at 4a

+%            }%

+%    \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond at 4a (fused position)

+%            \putlratom{140}{-127}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+%        \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%            \put(171,103){\line(0,-1){140}}%   % single bond at 4a

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(171,103)(171,-37)}}%

+%    \else\if\@tmpc U%beta single bond at 4a (fused position)

+%            \putlratom{140}{-127}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+%            \put(168,43){$\wr$}% unspecified single bond at 4a

+%            \put(168,-8){$\wr$}% 

+%            \put(168,-57){$\wr$}% 

+%    \else\if\@tmpc S%alpha single bond at 4a (fused position)

+%            \putlratom{140}{-127}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+%            \put(171,103){\line(0,-1){140}}%   % single bond at 4a

+%    \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%alpha single bond at 4a (fused position)

+%            \putlratom{140}{-127}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+%            \put(171,103){\line(0,-1){140}}%   % single bond at 4a

+%    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+%  \fi\fi%

+% %    \end{macrocode}

+% %

+% %    \begin{macrocode}

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% \or% subst. on 1

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%    \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+%     \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+%            \put(342,406){\line(0,1){140}}%    % single bond at 1

+%            \putlratom{311}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+%     \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+%            \putlatom{300}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(342,406){\line(-3,5){72}}%    % single bond at 1

+%            }%

+%     \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+%            \putratom{383}{563}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%        \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%            \put(342,406){\line(3,5){72}}%     % single bond at 1

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(342,406)(414,526)}}%

+%     \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+%            \putlatom{300}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+%            \put(342,406){\line(-3,5){72}}%    % single bond at 1

+%     \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+%            \putratom{383}{563}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%            \put(342,406){\line(3,5){72}}%     % single bond at 1

+%     \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi

+%    \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+%            \putlratom{311}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+%            \put(330,406){\line(0,1){140}}%    % double bond at 1

+%            \put(354,406){\line(0,1){140}}%    % double bond at 1

+%    \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+%            \putlratom{311}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(342,406){\line(0,1){140}}%    % single bond at 1

+%            }%

+%    \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+%            \putlratom{311}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+%            \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%              \put(342,406){\line(0,1){140}}%  %single bond at 1

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(342,406)(342,546)}}%

+%    \else%

+%            \putlratom{311}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+%            \put(342,406){\line(0,1){140}}%    % single bond at 1

+%    \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+% %    \end{macrocode}

+% %

+% %    \begin{macrocode}

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% \or% subst. on 2

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%    \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+%     \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+%            \putratom{643}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%            \put(513,303){\line(5,3){120}}%    % single bond at 2

+%     \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+%            \putratom{600}{410}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(513,303){\line(3,5){72}}%     % single bond at 2

+%            }%

+%     \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+%            \putratom{660}{280}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%        \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%            \put(513,303){\line(1,0){140}}%    % single bond at 2

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(513,303)(653,303)}}%

+%     \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+%            \putratom{600}{410}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%            \put(513,303){\line(3,5){72}}%     % single bond at 2

+%     \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+%            \putratom{660}{280}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%            \put(513,303){\line(1,0){140}}%    % single bond at 2

+%     \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+%    \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+%            \putratom{643}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%            \put(510,310){\line(5,3){120}}%  % double bond at 2

+%            \put(516,284){\line(5,3){120}}%  % double bond at 2

+%    \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+%            \putratom{643}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(513,303){\line(5,3){120}}%  % single bond at 2

+%            }%

+%    \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+%            \putratom{643}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%        \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%            \put(513,303){\line(5,3){120}}%    % single bond at 2

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(513,303)(633,375)}}%

+%    \else%

+%            \putratom{643}{363}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%            \put(513,303){\line(5,3){120}}%    % single bond at 2

+%    \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+% %    \end{macrocode}

+% %

+% %    \begin{macrocode}

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% \or% subst. on 3

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%    \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+%     \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+%            \putratom{643}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%            \put(513,103){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % single bond at 3

+%     \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+%            \putratom{600}{-70}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(513,103){\line(3,-5){72}}%    % single bond at 3

+%            }%

+%     \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+%            \putratom{660}{74}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+%        \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%            \put(513,103){\line(1,0){140}}%    % single bond at 3

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(513,103)(653,103)}}%

+%     \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+%            \putratom{600}{-70}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%            \put(513,103){\line(3,-5){72}}%    % single bond at 3

+%     \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+%            \putratom{660}{74}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+%            \put(513,103){\line(1,0){140}}%    % single bond at 3

+%     \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+%    \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+%            \putratom{643}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%            \put(510,96){\line(5,-3){120}}%    % double bond at 3

+%            \put(516,121){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % double bond at 3

+%    \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+%            \putratom{643}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(513,103){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % single bond at 3

+%            }%

+%    \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+%            \putratom{643}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%        \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%            \put(513,103){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % single bond at 3

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(513,103)(633,31)}}%

+%    \else%

+%            \putratom{643}{-27}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%            \put(513,103){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % single bond at 3

+%    \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+% %    \end{macrocode}

+% %

+% %    \begin{macrocode}

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% \or% subst. on 4

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 

+%    \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+%     \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+%            \putlratom{311}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+%            \put(342,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%     % single bond at 4

+%     \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+%            \putlatom{300}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(342,0){\line(-3,-5){72}}%     % single bond at 4

+%            }%

+%     \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+%            \putratom{383}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % right type

+%        \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%            \put(342,0){\line(3,-5){72}}%      % single bond at 4

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(342,0)(414,-120)}}%

+%     \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+%            \putlatom{300}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+%            \put(342,0){\line(-3,-5){72}}%     % single bond at 4

+%     \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+%            \putratom{383}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % right type

+%            \put(342,0){\line(3,-5){72}}%      % single bond at 4

+%     \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+%    \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+%            \putlratom{311}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+%            \put(330,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%     % double bond at 4

+%            \put(354,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%     % double bond at 4

+%    \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+%            \putlratom{311}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(342,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%     % single bond at 4

+%            }%

+%    \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+%            \putlratom{311}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+%        \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%            \put(342,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%     % single bond at 4

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(342,0)(342,-140)}}%

+%    \else%

+%            \putlratom{311}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+%            \put(342,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%     % single bond at 4

+%    \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+% %    \end{macrocode}

+% %

+% %    \begin{macrocode}

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% \or% subst. on 5

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%    \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+%     \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+%            \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+%            \put(0,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%       % single bond at 5

+%     \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+%            \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(0,0){\line(-3,-5){72}}%       % single bond at 5

+%            }%

+%     \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+%            \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%        \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%            \put(0,0){\line(3,-5){72}}%        % single bond at 5

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(0,0)(72,-120)}}%

+%     \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+%            \putlatom{-42}{-230}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+%            \put(0,0){\line(-3,-5){72}}%       % single bond at 5

+%     \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+%            \putratom{41}{-230}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%            \put(0,0){\line(3,-5){72}}%        % single bond at 5

+%     \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi

+%    \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+%            \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+%            \put(-12,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%     % double bond at 5

+%            \put(12,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%      % double bond at 5

+%    \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+%            \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(0,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%       % single bond at 5

+%            }%

+%    \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+%            \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+%        \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%            \put(0,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%       % single bond at 5

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(0,0)(0,-140)}}%

+%    \else% 

+%            \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+%            \put(0,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%       % single bond at 5

+%    \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+% %    \end{macrocode}

+% %

+% %    \begin{macrocode}

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% \or% subst. on 6

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%    \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+%     \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+%            \putlatom{-301}{-27}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+%            \put(-171,103){\line(-5,-3){120}}% % single bond at 6

+%     \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+%            \putlatom{-258}{-70}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(-171,103){\line(-3,-5){72}}%  % single bond at 6

+%            }%

+%     \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+%            \putlatom{-326}{74}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+%        \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%            \put(-171,103){\line(-1,0){140}}%  % single bond at 6

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(-171,103)(-311,103)}}%

+%     \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+%            \putlatom{-258}{-70}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+%            \put(-171,103){\line(-3,-5){72}}%  % single bond at 6

+%     \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+%            \putlatom{-326}{74}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+%            \put(-171,103){\line(-1,0){140}}%  % single bond at 6

+%     \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi

+%    \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+%            \putlatom{-301}{-27}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+%            \put(-168,96){\line(-5,-3){120}}%  % double bond at 6

+%            \put(-174,121){\line(-5,-3){120}}% % double bond at 6

+%    \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+%             \putlatom{-301}{-27}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(-171,103){\line(-5,-3){120}}% % single bond at 6

+%            }%

+%    \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+%             \putlatom{-301}{-27}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+%        \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%            \put(-171,103){\line(-5,-3){120}}% % single bond at 6

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(-171,103)(-311,31)}}%

+%    \else%

+%             \putlatom{-301}{-27}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+%             \put(-171,103){\line(-5,-3){120}}% single bond at 6

+%    \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+% %    \end{macrocode}

+% %

+% %    \begin{macrocode}

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% \or% subst. on 7

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%    \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+%     \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+%            \putlatom{-301}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+%            \put(-171,303){\line(-5,3){120}}%  % single bond at 7

+%     \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+%            \putlatom{-258}{410}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(-171,303){\line(-3,5){72}}%   % single bond at 7

+%            }%

+%     \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+%            \putlatom{-326}{280}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+%        \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%            \put(-171,303){\line(-1,0){140}}%  % single bond at 7

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(-171,303)(-311,303)}}%

+%     \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+%            \putlatom{-258}{410}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+%            \put(-171,303){\line(-3,5){72}}%   % single bond at 7

+%     \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+%            \putlatom{-326}{280}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+%            \put(-171,303){\line(-1,0){140}}%  % single bond at 7

+%     \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi

+%    \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+%            \putlatom{-301}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+%            \put(-168,310){\line(-5,3){120}}%  % double bond at 7

+%            \put(-174,284){\line(-5,3){120}}%  % double bond at 7

+%    \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+%            \putlatom{-301}{363}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(-171,303){\line(-5,3){120}}%  % single bond at 7

+%            }%

+%    \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+%            \putlatom{-301}{363}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+%        \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%            \put(-171,303){\line(-5,3){120}}%   % single bond at 7

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(-171,303)(-311,375)}}%

+%    \else%

+%            \putlatom{-301}{363}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+%            \put(-171,303){\line(-5,3){120}}%   % single bond at 7

+%    \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+% %    \end{macrocode}

+% %

+% %    \begin{macrocode}

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% \or% subst. on 8

+% % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%    \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+%     \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+%            \put(0,406){\line(0,1){140}}%      % single bond at 8

+%            \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+%     \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+%            \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(0,406){\line(-3,5){72}}%      % single bond at 8

+%            }%

+%     \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+%            \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+%        \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%            \put(0,406){\line(3,5){72}}%       % single bond at 8

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(0,406)(72,526)}}%

+%     \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+%            \putlatom{-42}{563}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+%            \put(0,406){\line(-3,5){72}}%      % single bond at 8

+%     \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+%            \putratom{41}{563}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+%            \put(0,406){\line(3,5){72}}%       % single bond at 8

+%     \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+%    \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+%            \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+%            \put(-12,406){\line(0,1){140}}%    % double bond at 8

+%            \put(12,406){\line(0,1){140}}%     % double bond at 8

+%    \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+%            \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+%            {%

+%            \thicklines%

+%            \put(0,406){\line(0,1){140}}%      % single bond at 8

+%            }%

+%    \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+%            \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+%            \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%              \put(0,406){\line(0,1){140}}%    % single bond at 8

+%            }{{\thicklines%

+%               \dottedline{20}(0,406)(0,546)}}%

+%    \else%

+%            \putlratom{-31}{563}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+%            \put(0,406){\line(0,1){140}}%      % single bond at 8

+%    \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+% \fi %end of ifcase

+% \fi\fi}}%

+% %    \end{macrocode}

+% % \end{macro}

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% \subsection{Setting-up substituents and bonds at fused positions}

+%

+% The command |\ylfusedposition| is to obtain the shift values 

+% |\@ylii| and |\@yli| which are used for shifting the standard 

+% point of a substituent. 

+% The locant flags such as |\@ylatrue| have been stopped to use. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/11}{Delete \cs{@ylatrue} etc.}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/13}{Adding \cs{@fused@link} condition}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Commands for setting substituents}
+%

+% \begin{macro}{\ylfusedposition}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\ylfusedposition#1#2#3#4#5{%

+\@@ylswfalse%\@reset@ylsw

+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%

+\if@@ylsw\else%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%

+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi

+\if@@ylsw

+\ifnum#5<0\relax%

+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax\advance\@tmpaa by #2\relax%

+\@fused@linktrue

+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax\advance\@tmpaa by #2\relax

+\@fused@linkfalse\fi%

+\ifnum\@tmpaa >#3\relax%

+\ifnum\@tmpaa <#4\relax%

+\ifcase\@tmpaa%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% 0 fused positions   % F == (171,303)  G == (171,103)

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 

+ \if\@tmpb F%single bond at F (fused position)

+    \def\@ylii{-171}\def\@yli{-303}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 0

+ \else\if\@tmpb G%single bond at G (fused position)

+    \def\@ylii{-171}\def\@yli{-103}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 0

+ \fi\fi%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\or% subst. on 1  F == (0,406), G == (171,303) for \@fused@linkfalse

+   % subst. on 1  G == (0,406), F == (171,303) for \@fused@linktrue

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\if@fused@link

+ \if\@tmpb G%single bond at F (5,-3) fusion

+      \def\@ylii{0}\def\@yli{-406}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1

+ \else\if\@tmpb F%single bond at G

+      \def\@ylii{-171}\def\@yli{-303}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1

+ \fi\fi%

+\else

+ \if\@tmpb F%single bond at F (5,-3) fusion

+      \def\@ylii{0}\def\@yli{-406}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1

+ \else\if\@tmpb G%single bond at G

+      \def\@ylii{-171}\def\@yli{-303}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1

+ \fi\fi%

+\fi

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\or% subst. on 2  F == (0,406), G == (-171,303) for \@fused@linkfalse

+   % subst. on 2  G == (0,406), F == (-171,303) for \@fused@linktrue

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\if@fused@link

+ \if\@tmpb G%single bond at (-5,-3) fusion

+      \def\@ylii{0}\def\@yli{-406}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 2

+ \else\if\@tmpb F%single bond at G

+      \def\@ylii{171}\def\@yli{-303}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 2

+ \fi\fi%

+\else

+ \if\@tmpb F%single bond at (-5,-3) fusion

+      \def\@ylii{0}\def\@yli{-406}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 2

+ \else\if\@tmpb G%single bond at G

+      \def\@ylii{171}\def\@yli{-303}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 2

+ \fi\fi%

+\fi

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\or %3 fused positions   % G == (303,171)  F == (103,171)

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 

+ \if\@tmpb G%single bond at G (fused position)

+      \def\@ylii{-303}\def\@yli{-171}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 3

+ \else\if\@tmpb F%single bond at F (fused position)

+      \def\@ylii{-103}\def\@yli{-171}\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 3

+ \fi\fi%

+\fi%end of ifcase

+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}}% end of \ylfusedposition

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The bond-setting commands |\GFbonda|, |\GFbondb|, |\GFbondc| and 

+% |\GFbondd|, which are separated from the old |\setfusedbond| command, 

+% are used to place a bond and a substituent at a fulsed position of 

+% such a compound as a decaline.  

+%

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/12}{Separate \cs{GFbonda} etc.}

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%

+% \begin{macro}{\GFbonda}

+% \begin{macro}{\GFbonda@a}

+% \begin{macro}{\GFbonda@b}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\GFbonda{%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% 0 fused positions   % F == (171,303)  G == (171,103)

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 

+ \if\@tmpb F%single bond at F (fused position)

+   \GFbonda@a

+ \else\if\@tmpb G%single bond at G (fused position)

+   \GFbonda@b

+ \fi\fi%

+}%end of GFbonda

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\GFbonda@a{%

+   \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%460-(303+140)

+           \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(171,303){\line(0,1){140}}%    % single bond at F

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%460-(303+140)

+           \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+             \put(171,303){\line(0,1){140}}%  % single bond at F

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(171,303)(171,443)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpc U% unspecified single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%460-(303+140)

+           \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           \put(168,303){$\wr$}% unspecified single bond at F

+           \put(168,353){$\wr$}%

+           \put(168,403){$\wr$}%

+   \else\if\@tmpc S%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%460-(303+140)

+           \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+             \put(171,303){\line(0,1){140}}%  % single bond at F

+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%460-(303+140)

+           \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+             \put(171,303){\line(0,1){140}}%  % single bond at F

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}%

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\GFbonda@b{%

+   \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%127-(140-103)

+           \putlratom{140}{-127}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(171,103){\line(0,-1){140}}%   % single bond at G

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%127-(140-103)

+           \putlratom{140}{-127}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(171,103){\line(0,-1){140}}%   % single bond at G

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(171,103)(171,-37)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpc U%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%127-(140-103)

+           \putlratom{140}{-127}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+           \put(168,43){$\wr$}% unspecified single bond at G

+           \put(168,-8){$\wr$}% 

+           \put(168,-57){$\wr$}% 

+   \else\if\@tmpc S%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%127-(140-103)

+           \putlratom{140}{-127}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+           \put(171,103){\line(0,-1){140}}%   % single bond at G

+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%171-140

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%127-(140-103)

+           \putlratom{140}{-127}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+           \put(171,103){\line(0,-1){140}}%   % single bond at G

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}%

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\GFbondb}

+% \begin{macro}{\GFbondb@a}

+% \begin{macro}{\GFbondb@b}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\GFbondb{%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% subst. on 1  F == (0,406), G == (171,303) for \@fused@linkfalse

+% subst. on 1  G == (0,406), F == (171,303) for \@fused@linktrue

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+ \if@fused@link

+ \if\@tmpb G%single bond at G (5,-3) fusion

+    \GFbondb@a

+ \else\if\@tmpb F%single bond at F

+    \GFbondb@b

+ \fi\fi%

+ \else

+ \if\@tmpb F%single bond at F (5,-3) fusion

+    \GFbondb@a

+ \else\if\@tmpb G%single bond at G

+    \GFbondb@b

+ \fi\fi%

+ \fi

+}% end of \GFbondb

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\GFbondb@a{%

+   \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=22\relax%

+           \putlatom{-130}{466}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,406){\line(-5,3){120}}%     % single bond at F

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=22\relax%

+           \putlatom{-130}{466}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,406){\line(-5,3){120}}%     % single bond at F

+           }{{\thicklines%

+%              \dottedline{20}(0,406)(-140,478)}}%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,406)(-120,478)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpc U%unspecified single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=22\relax%

+           \putlatom{-130}{466}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(0,406){\line(-5,3){120}}%     % single bond at F

+   \else\if\@tmpc S%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=22\relax%

+           \putlatom{-130}{466}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(0,406){\line(-5,3){120}}%     % single bond at F

+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=22\relax%

+           \putlatom{-130}{466}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(0,406){\line(-5,3){120}}%     % single bond at F

+   \else\if\@tmpc D%beta single bond (downward)

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%

+           \putlratom{-31}{176}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,406){\line(0,-1){140}}%     % single bond at F

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpc C%alpha single bond (downward)

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%

+           \putlratom{-31}{176}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,406){\line(0,-1){140}}%     % single bond at F

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,406)(0,266)}}%

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of \GFbondb@a

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\GFbondb@b{%

+   \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax%

+           \putratom{301}{173}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(171,303){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % single bond at G

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax%

+           \putratom{301}{173}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(171,303){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % single bond at G

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(171,303)(291,231)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpc U%unspecified single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax%

+           \putratom{301}{173}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(171,303){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % single bond at G

+   \else\if\@tmpc S%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax%

+           \putratom{301}{173}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(171,303){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % single bond at G

+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax%

+           \putratom{301}{173}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(171,303){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % single bond at G

+   \else\if\@tmpc D%beta single bond (upward)

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%

+           \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(171,303){\line(0,1){140}}%    % single bond at G

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpc C%alpha single bond (upward)

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%

+           \putlratom{140}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+             \put(171,303){\line(0,1){140}}%  % single bond at G

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(171,303)(171,443)}}%

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of \GFbondb@b

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\GFbondc}

+% \begin{macro}{\GFbondc@a}

+% \begin{macro}{\GFbondc@b}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\GFbondc{%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% subst. on 2  F == (0,406), G == (-171,303) for \@fused@linkfalse

+% subst. on 2  G == (0,406), F == (-171,303) for \@fused@linktrue

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\if@fused@link

+ \if\@tmpb G%single bond at (-5,-3) fusion

+      \GFbondc@a

+ \else\if\@tmpb F%single bond at F

+      \GFbondc@b

+ \fi\fi%

+\else

+ \if\@tmpb F%single bond at (-5,-3) fusion

+      \GFbondc@a

+ \else\if\@tmpb G%single bond at G

+      \GFbondc@b

+ \fi\fi%

+\fi

+}% end of \GFbondc

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+  \def\GFbondc@a{%

+   \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax%

+           \putratom{130}{466}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,406){\line(5,3){120}}%      % single bond at F

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax%

+           \putratom{130}{466}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,406){\line(5,3){120}}%      % single bond at F

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,406)(120,478)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpc U%unspecified single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax%

+           \putratom{130}{466}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(0,406){\line(5,3){120}}%      % single bond at F

+   \else\if\@tmpc S%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax%

+           \putratom{130}{466}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(0,406){\line(5,3){120}}%      % single bond at F

+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=12\relax%

+           \putratom{130}{466}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(0,406){\line(5,3){120}}%      % single bond at F

+   \else\if\@tmpc D%beta single bond (downward)

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%

+           \putlratom{-31}{176}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,406){\line(0,-1){140}}%     % single bond at F

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpc C%alpha single bond (downward)

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax%

+           \putlratom{-31}{176}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,406){\line(0,-1){140}}%     % single bond at F

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,406)(0,266)}}%

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of \GFbondc@a

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\GFbondc@b{%

+   \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=59\relax%

+            \putlatom{-301}{173}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-171,303){\line(-5,-3){120}}% % single bond at G

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=59\relax%

+            \putlatom{-301}{173}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-171,303){\line(-5,-3){120}}% % single bond at G

+           }{{\thicklines%

+%              \dottedline{20}(-171,303)(-311,231)}}%

+              \dottedline{20}(-171,303)(-291,231)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpc U%unspecified single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=59\relax%

+            \putlatom{-301}{173}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+            \put(-171,303){\line(-5,-3){120}}%  single bond at G

+   \else\if\@tmpc S%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=59\relax%

+            \putlatom{-301}{173}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+            \put(-171,303){\line(-5,-3){120}}%  single bond at G

+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=59\relax%

+            \putlatom{-301}{173}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+            \put(-171,303){\line(-5,-3){120}}%  single bond at G

+   \else\if\@tmpc D%beta single bond (upward)

+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%

+           \putlratom{201}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-171,303){\line(0,1){140}}%   % single bond at G

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpc C%alpha single bond (upward)

+      \yl@xdiff=-30\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax%

+           \putlratom{201}{460}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+             \put(-171,303){\line(0,1){140}}% % single bond at G

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-171,303)(-171,443)}}%

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of \GFbondc@b

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\GFbondd}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\GFbondd{%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% 3 fused positions   % G == (303,171)  F == (103,171)

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 

+ \if\@tmpb G%single bond at G (fused position)

+   \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%

+           \putlratom{460}{140}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(303,171){\line(1,0){140}}%    % single bond at G

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%

+           \putlratom{460}{140}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+              \put(303,171){\line(1,0){140}}% % single bond at G

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(303,171)(443,171)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpc U% unspecified single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%

+           \putlratom{460}{140}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           \put(303,148){$\sim$}% unspecified single bond at G

+           \put(353,148){$\sim$}%

+           \put(403,148){$\sim$}%

+   \else\if\@tmpc S%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%

+           \putlratom{460}{140}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           \put(303,171){\line(1,0){140}}%    % single bond at G

+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%

+           \putlratom{460}{140}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+           \put(303,171){\line(1,0){140}}%    % single bond at G

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+ \else\if\@tmpb F%single bond at F (fused position)

+   \if\@tmpc B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%

+%           \putlratom{-127}{140}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+           \putlatom{-57}{140}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(103,171){\line(-1,0){140}}%   % single bond at F

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpc A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%

+%           \putlratom{-127}{140}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+           \putlatom{-57}{140}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(103,171){\line(-1,0){140}}%   % single bond at F

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(103,171)(-37,171)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpc U%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%

+           \putlatom{-57}{140}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+%           \putlratom{-127}{140}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+           \put(40,148){$\sim$}% unspecified single bond at F

+           \put(-13,148){$\sim$}% 

+           \put(-62,148){$\sim$}% 

+   \else\if\@tmpc S%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%

+           \putlatom{-57}{140}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+%           \putlratom{-127}{140}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+           \put(103,171){\line(-1,0){140}}%   % single bond at F

+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax%

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax%

+           \putlatom{-57}{140}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+%           \putlratom{-127}{140}{\@memberb}%  % left or right type

+           \put(103,171){\line(-1,0){140}}%   % single bond at F

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+ \fi\fi%

+}% end of \GFbondd

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The |\setfusedbond| takes 5 arguments. 

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+% ******************************************************

+% * setting of atoms and bonds at fused bond positions *

+% ******************************************************

+%

+%   \setfusedbond{SUBSLIST}{AD}{LOWER}{UPPER}{ORDER}

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% The first argument |SUBSLIST| is a list of substituents, which is 

+% represented in the standard format of \XyMTeX{}. 

+% Substituents at the fused positions (vertical bonds) are designated by 

+% the number 0 and the following bond modifiers.   

+% They are placed by means of the |\GFbonda| command. 

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 3 substitution positions)

+%

+%        for 0 (vertical (0,1) fused positions)

+%                F == (171,303)  G == (171,103)

+%

+%           0FA        :  alpha single bond at F 

+%           0FB        :  beta single bond at F

+%           0FU        :  unspecified single bond at F

+%           0GA        :  alpha single bond at G 

+%           0GB        :  beta single bond at G

+%           0GU        :  unspecified single bond at G

+%

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% Substituents at the fused positions (diagonal bonds) are designated by 

+% the number 1 and the following bond modifiers.   

+% They are placed by means of the |\GFbondb| command. 

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%        for 1 (diagonal (5,-3) fused positions)

+%                F == (0,406), G == (171,303)

+%

+%           1FA        :  alpha single bond at F 

+%           1FB        :  beta single bond at F

+%           1FC        :  alpha single bond (downward) at F 

+%           1FD        :  beta single bond (downward) at F

+%           1FU        :  unspecified single bond at F

+%           1GA        :  alpha single bond at G 

+%           1GB        :  beta single bond at G

+%           1GC        :  alpha single bond (upward) at G

+%           1GD        :  beta single bond (upward) at G

+%           1GU        :  unspecified single bond at G

+%

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% Substituents at the fused positions (other diagonal bonds) are designated by 

+% the number 2 and the following bond modifiers.   

+% They are placed by means of the |\GFbondc| command. 

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%        for 2 (diagonal (-5,-3) fused positions)

+%                F == (0,406), G == (-171,303)

+%

+%           2FA        :  alpha single bond at F 

+%           2FB        :  beta single bond at F

+%           2FC        :  alpha single bond (upward) at F 

+%           2FD        :  beta single bond (upward) at F

+%           2FU        :  unspecified single bond at F

+%           2GA        :  alpha single bond at G 

+%           2GB        :  beta single bond at G

+%           2GC        :  alpha single bond (downward) at G

+%           2GD        :  beta single bond (downward) at G

+%           2GU        :  unspecified single bond at G

+%

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% Substituents at the fused positions (horizontal bonds) are designated by 

+% the number 3 and the following bond modifiers.   

+% They are placed by means of the |\GFbondd| command. 

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%        for 3 (horizontal (1,0) fused positions)

+%                G == (303,171)  F == (103,171)

+% %%%%                F == (303,171)  G == (103,171)

+%

+%           3FA        :  alpha single bond at F 

+%           3FB        :  beta single bond at F

+%           3FU        :  unspecified single bond at F

+%           3GA        :  alpha single bond at G 

+%           3GB        :  beta single bond at G

+%           3GU        :  unspecified single bond at G

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% The second argument |AD| is an adjustment value, which adjusts the original 

+% set of locant numbers into the standard one between 0 to 3 for drawing 

+% substituents on fused positions. 

+% The effective range of the standared set of locant numbers is 

+% restricted by the auguments |LOWER| and |UPPER|.  A minus value of 

+% the last argument shows the anti-clockwise numbering, while zero or 

+% a plus value represents the clockwise numbering. 

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%

+%    AD       : adjustment      e.g. 0 for six-membered rings

+%    LOWER    : lower limit     LOWER < effective range < UPPER

+%    UPPER    : upper limit

+%    ORDER    : >= 0 clockwise, <0 anti-clockwise

+%

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding the \cs{\@memberb=\@y} condition}

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Separate \cs{GFbonda} etc.}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\setfusedbond}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\newif\if@fused@link \@fused@linkfalse

+\def\setfusedbond#1#2#3#4#5{%

+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%

+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else

+\ifnum#5<0\relax%

+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax\advance\@tmpaa by #2\relax\@fused@linktrue

+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax\advance\@tmpaa by #2\relax

+\@fused@linkfalse\fi%

+\ifnum\@tmpaa >#3\relax%

+\ifnum\@tmpaa <#4\relax%

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\ifcase\@tmpaa%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% 0 fused positions   % F == (171,303)  G == (171,103)

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 

+\GFbonda

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\or% subst. on 1  F == (0,406), G == (171,303)

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\GFbondb

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\or% subst. on 2  F == (0,406), G == (-171,303) for \@fused@linkfalse

+   % subst. on 2  G == (0,406), F == (-171,303) for \@fused@linktrue

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\GFbondc

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\or %3 fused positions   % G == (303,171)  F == (103,171)

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 

+\GFbondd

+\fi%end of ifcase

+\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Setting-up substituents and bonds at a given postion}

+%

+% The |\setatombond| takes 3 arguments. 

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+% ********************************************************

+% * setting of atoms and bonds at an appropiate position *

+% ********************************************************

+%

+%   \setatombond{SUBSLIST}{AD}{SLOPE}

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% The first argument |SUBSLIST| is a list of substituents, which is 

+% represented in the standard format of \XyMTeX{}. 

+% Substituents at the fused positions (vertical bonds) are designated by 

+% the number 0 and the following bond modifiers.   

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 3 substitution positions)

+% \end{verbatim}

+%    

+% The second argument |AD| is an adjustment value, which adjusts the original 

+% locant number into 1. 

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%     AD       : adjustment, 

+%         Set AD as being 1  = position number - AD

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% The argument |SLOPE| has the following meanings. 

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%     SLOPE    

+%       

+%       1      : (0,1)              7     : (0,-1)

+%       2      : (3,5)              8     : (-3,-5)

+%       3      : (5,3)              9     : (-5,-3)

+%       4      : (1,0)             10     : (-1,0)

+%       5      : (5,-3)            11     : (-5,3)

+%       6      : (3,-5)            12     : (-3,5)

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/14}{The bond-setting commands such as 

+%   \cs{setatombonda} ... \cs{setatombondh} are separated from 

+%   the original \cs{setatombond}.}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\setatombond}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\newif\if@clipfuse \@clipfusefalse

+\def\setatombond#1#2#3{%

+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%

+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax\advance\@tmpaa by #2\relax

+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else

+\ifnum\@tmpaa >0\relax%

+\ifnum\@tmpaa <2\relax%

+\ifcase\@tmpaa%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\or% subst. on 1

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%

+% (0,1)

+%

+ \ifnum#3=1\relax%(upward)

+   \setatombonda

+%

+% (1,0)

+%

+ \else\ifnum#3=4\relax%(right)

+   \setatombondb

+%

+% (0,-1)

+%

+ \else\ifnum#3=7\relax%(downward)

+   \setatombondc

+%

+% (-5,3)

+%

+ \else\ifnum#3=11\relax%

+   \setatombondd

+%

+% (5,-3)

+%

+ \else\ifnum#3=5\relax%

+   \setatombonde

+%

+% (5,3)

+%

+ \else\ifnum#3=3\relax%

+   \setatombondf

+%

+% (-5,-3)

+%

+ \else\ifnum#3=9\relax%

+   \setatombondg

+%

+% (-1,0)

+%

+ \else\ifnum#3=10\relax%(left)

+   \setatombondh

+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+\fi%end of ifcase

+\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The command |\setatombond| uses the following bond-setting 

+% commands.

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\setatombonda}

+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondb}

+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondc}

+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondd}

+% \begin{macro}{\setatombonde}

+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondf}

+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondg}

+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondh}

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setatombonda{%upward (0,1)

+  \if@clipfuse%

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+%           \put(0,30){\line(0,1){110}}%  % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,40){\line(0,1){100}}%  % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%           \put(0,30){\line(0,1){110}}%  % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,40){\line(0,1){100}}%  % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+%              \dottedline{20}(0,30)(0,140)}}%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,40)(0,140)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U% unspecified single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \put(-3,30){$\wr$}% unspecified single bond at 1

+           \put(-3,80){$\wr$}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+%           \put(0,30){\line(0,1){110}}%  % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,40){\line(0,1){100}}%  % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \put(-10,40){\line(0,1){100}}%  % single bond at 1

+           \put(10,40){\line(0,1){100}}%  % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \put(-15,40){\line(0,1){100}}%  % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,40){\line(0,1){100}}%  % single bond at 1

+           \put(15,40){\line(0,1){100}}%  % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+%           \put(0,30){\line(0,1){110}}%  % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,40){\line(0,1){100}}%  % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putlratom{-31}{157}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+  \else%no clip

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(0,1){140}}%  % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(0,1){140}}%  % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(0,140)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U% unspecified single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \put(-3,0){$\wr$}% unspecified single bond at 1

+           \put(-3,50){$\wr$}%

+           \put(-3,100){$\wr$}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \put(0,0){\line(0,1){140}}%  % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \put(-10,0){\line(0,1){140}}%  % single bond at 1

+           \put(10,0){\line(0,1){140}}%  % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \put(-15,0){\line(0,1){140}}%  % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(0,1){140}}%  % single bond at 1

+           \put(15,0){\line(0,1){140}}%  % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-17\relax

+           \put(0,0){\line(0,1){140}}%  % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putlratom{-31}{157}{\@memberb}%   % left or right type

+  \fi%

+}% end of \setatombonda

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setatombondb{%(right) (1,0)

+  \if@clipfuse%

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(30,0){\line(1,0){110}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(30,0){\line(1,0){110}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(30,0)(140,0)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \put(30,0){\line(1,0){110}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \put(40,0){\line(1,0){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \put(40,10){\line(1,0){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(40,-10){\line(1,0){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \put(40,15){\line(1,0){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(40,0){\line(1,0){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(40,-15){\line(1,0){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \put(40,0){\line(1,0){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putratom{157}{-31}{\@memberb}%   % right type only

+  \else%

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(140,0)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \put(0,10){\line(1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,-10){\line(1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \put(0,-15){\line(1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,15){\line(1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putratom{157}{-31}{\@memberb}%   % right type only

+  \fi%

+}% end of \setatombondb

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setatombondc{%(downward) (0,-1)

+  \if@clipfuse%

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+%           \put(0,-30){\line(0,-1){110}}%    % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,-40){\line(0,-1){100}}%    % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%           \put(0,-30){\line(0,-1){110}}%    % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,-40){\line(0,-1){100}}%    % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+%              \dottedline{20}(0,-30)(0,-140)}}%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,-40)(0,-140)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \put(-3,-90){$\wr$}% unspecified single bond at 1

+           \put(-3,-140){$\wr$}% 

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+%           \put(0,-30){\line(0,-1){110}}%    % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,-40){\line(0,-1){100}}%    % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \put(10,-40){\line(0,-1){100}}%    % single bond at 1

+           \put(-10,-40){\line(0,-1){100}}%    % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \put(15,-40){\line(0,-1){100}}%    % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,-40){\line(0,-1){100}}%    % single bond at 1

+           \put(-15,-40){\line(0,-1){100}}%    % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+%           \put(0,-30){\line(0,-1){110}}%    % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,-40){\line(0,-1){100}}%    % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+       \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}% % left or right type

+  \else%no clipping

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(0,-140)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \put(-3,-60){$\wr$}% unspecified single bond at 1

+           \put(-3,-110){$\wr$}% 

+           \put(-3,-160){$\wr$}% 

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \put(0,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \put(10,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(-10,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \put(15,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(-15,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=31\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=90\relax

+           \put(0,0){\line(0,-1){140}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+       \putlratom{-31}{-230}{\@memberb}% % left or right type

+  \fi%

+}% end of \setatombondc

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setatombondd{% (-5,3)

+  \if@clipfuse%

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=18\relax

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-30,18){\line(-5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-30,18){\line(-5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-30,18)(-130,78)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(-30,18){\line(-5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+           \put(-30,18){\line(-5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond

+           \put(-36,8){\line(-5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-24,24){\line(-5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond

+           \put(-39,3){\line(-5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-30,18){\line(-5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-21,33){\line(-5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+           \put(-30,18){\line(-5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putlatom{-130}{60}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+  \else%no clipping

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=18\relax

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(-130,78)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond

+           \put(6,10){\line(-5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-6,-10){\line(-5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond

+           \put(9,15){\line(-5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-9,-15){\line(-5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putlatom{-130}{60}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+  \fi%

+}% end of \setatombondd

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setatombonde{%(5,-3)

+  \if@clipfuse%

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=52\relax

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+%           \put(20,-12){\line(5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(30,-18){\line(5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+%           \putratom{301}{173}{\@memberb}%   % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%           \put(20,-12){\line(5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(30,-18){\line(5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+%              \dottedline{20}(20,-12)(120,-72)}}%

+              \dottedline{20}(30,-18)(130,-78)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(30,-18){\line(5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+%           \put(20,-12){\line(5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%alpha single bond

+           \put(30,-18){\line(5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+%           \put(20,-12){\line(5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond

+           \put(36,-12){\line(5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(24,-28){\line(5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond

+           \put(39,-3){\line(5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(30,-18){\line(5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(21,-33){\line(5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%alpha single bond

+           \put(30,-18){\line(5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+%           \put(20,-12){\line(5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putratom{140}{-130}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+%           \putratom{130}{-130}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+  \else%no clipping

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=52\relax

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+%           \put(0,0){\line(5,-3){120}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+%           \putratom{301}{173}{\@memberb}%   % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%           \put(0,0){\line(5,-3){120}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+%              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(120,-72)}}%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(130,-78)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+%           \put(0,0){\line(5,-3){120}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%alpha single bond

+%           \put(0,0){\line(5,-3){120}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond

+           \put(6,10){\line(5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(-6,-10){\line(5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond

+           \put(9,15){\line(5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(-9,-15){\line(5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%alpha single bond

+%           \put(0,0){\line(5,-3){120}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putratom{140}{-130}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+  \fi%

+}% end of \setatombonde

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setatombondf{%% (5,3)

+  \if@clipfuse%

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=18\relax

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+%           \put(20,12){\line(5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(30,18){\line(5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(30,18){\line(5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+%           \put(20,12){\line(5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(30,18)(130,78)}}%

+%              \dottedline{20}(0,406)(120,72)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(30,18){\line(5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+%           \put(20,12){\line(5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+%           \put(20,12){\line(5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(30,18){\line(5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond

+           \put(36,8){\line(5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(24,24){\line(5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond

+           \put(39,3){\line(5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(30,18){\line(5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(21,33){\line(5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+           \put(30,18){\line(5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+%           \put(20,12){\line(5,3){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putratom{140}{60}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%           \putratom{130}{60}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+  \else%no clipping

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=18\relax

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+%           \put(0,0){\line(5,3){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+%           \putratom{130}{466}{\@memberb}%   % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+%           \put(0,0){\line(5,3){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(130,78)}}%

+%              \dottedline{20}(0,406)(120,72)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+%           \put(0,0){\line(5,3){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+%           \put(0,0){\line(5,3){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond

+           \put(6,-10){\line(5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-6,10){\line(5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond

+           \put(9,-15){\line(5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-9,15){\line(5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+%           \put(0,0){\line(5,3){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(5,3){130}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putratom{140}{60}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+%           \putratom{130}{60}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+  \fi%

+}% end of \setatombondf

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setatombondg{%% (-5,-3)

+  \if@clipfuse%

+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax

+%      \yl@ydiff=62\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=52\relax%1999/1/6 by Shinsaku Fujita

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-30,-18){\line(-5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-30,-18){\line(-5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-20,-12)(-120,-72)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpc U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(-30,-18){\line(-5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpc S%alpha single bond

+           \put(-30,-18){\line(-5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+           \put(-36,-12){\line(-5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(-24,-28){\line(-5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond

+           \put(-39,-3){\line(-5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(-30,-18){\line(-5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(-21,-33){\line(-5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+  \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%alpha single bond

+           \put(-30,-18){\line(-5,-3){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putlatom{-130}{-130}{\@memberb}% % left type

+  \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax

+%      \yl@ydiff=62\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=52\relax%1999/1/6 by Shinsaku Fujita

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(-130,-78)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpc U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpc S%alpha single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond

+           \put(-6,10){\line(-5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(6,-10){\line(-5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond

+           \put(-9,15){\line(-5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+           \put(9,-15){\line(-5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpc\empty%alpha single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,-3){130}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putlatom{-130}{-130}{\@memberb}% % left type

+  \fi%

+}% end of \setatombondg

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setatombondh{% (-1,0)

+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+  \if@clipfuse%

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-30,0){\line(-1,0){110}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-30,0){\line(-1,0){110}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-30,0)(-140,0)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%beta single bond

+           \put(-30,0){\line(-1,0){110}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%alpha single bond

+           \put(-40,0){\line(-1,0){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond

+           \put(-40,10){\line(-1,0){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-40,-10){\line(-1,0){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond

+           \put(-40,15){\line(-1,0){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-40,0){\line(-1,0){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-40,-15){\line(-1,0){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%alpha single bond

+           \put(-40,0){\line(-1,0){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%   % left type only

+  \else%

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(-140,0)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%beta single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%alpha single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%alpha single bond

+           \put(0,10){\line(-1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,-10){\line(-1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%alpha single bond

+           \put(0,-15){\line(-1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,15){\line(-1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%alpha single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%   % left type only

+  \fi%

+}% end of \setatombondh

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The macro |\ylatombondposition| is used to calculate the shift values 

+% (|\@ylii| and |\@yli|) for applying the |\setatombond| command. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/15}{New command: \cs{ylatombondposition} 

+% for setting substituents}
+%

+% \begin{macro}{\ylatombondposition}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\ylatombondposition#1#2#3{%

+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw

+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%

+\if@@ylsw\else%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%

+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi

+\if@@ylsw

+\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax\advance\@tmpaa by #2\relax

+\ifnum\@tmpaa >0\relax%

+\ifnum\@tmpaa <2\relax%

+\ifcase\@tmpaa%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\or% subst. on 1

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%

+% (0,1)

+%

+ \ifnum#3=1\relax%upward

+  \if@clipfuse%

+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{-48}\global\@ylswtrue%

+  \else

+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%

+  \fi

+%   \setatombonda

+%

+% (1,0)

+%

+ \else\ifnum#3=4\relax%(right)

+  \if@clipfuse%

+   \gdef\@ylii{-40}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%

+  \else

+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%

+  \fi

+%   \setatombondb

+%

+% (0,-1)

+%

+ \else\ifnum#3=7\relax%(downward)

+  \if@clipfuse%

+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{48}\global\@ylswtrue%

+  \else

+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%

+  \fi

+%   \setatombondc

+%

+% (-5,3)

+%

+ \else\ifnum#3=11\relax%

+  \if@clipfuse%

+   \gdef\@ylii{50}\gdef\@yli{-30}\global\@ylswtrue%

+  \else

+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%

+  \fi

+%   \setatombondd

+%

+% (5,-3)

+%

+ \else\ifnum#3=5\relax%

+  \if@clipfuse%

+   \gdef\@ylii{-50}\gdef\@yli{30}\global\@ylswtrue%

+  \else

+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%

+  \fi

+%   \setatombonde

+%

+% (5,3)

+%

+ \else\ifnum#3=3\relax%

+  \if@clipfuse%

+   \gdef\@ylii{-50}\gdef\@yli{-30}\global\@ylswtrue%

+  \else

+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%

+  \fi

+%   \setatombondf

+%

+% (-5,-3)

+%

+ \else\ifnum#3=9\relax%

+  \if@clipfuse%

+   \gdef\@ylii{50}\gdef\@yli{30}\global\@ylswtrue%

+  \else

+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%

+  \fi

+%   \setatombondg

+%

+% (-1,0)

+%

+ \else\ifnum#3=10\relax%(left)

+  \if@clipfuse%

+   \gdef\@ylii{40}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%

+  \else

+   \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%

+  \fi

+%   \setatombondh

+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+\fi%end of ifcase

+\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+\fi}}% end of \ylatombondposition

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \section{Macros for horizontal formulas}

+% \subsection{Placing substituents for horizontal formulas}

+%

+% Such a drawing command as |\setsixringh| uses several inner macros 

+% for placing substituents with bonds. The first set of inner macros 

+% are shown as follows. 

+%

+% The command |\ylpositionh| is to obtain the shift values 

+% |\@ylii| and |\@yli| which are used for shifting the standard point 

+% of a substituent. 

+% The locant flags such as |\@ylatrue| have been stopped to use. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{ylpositionh}. 

+% Commands for setting substituents}
+%

+% \begin{macro}{\ylpositionh}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\ylpositionh#1#2#3#4#5{%

+\@@ylswfalse%%%\@reset@ylsw

+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%

+\if@@ylsw\else%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}\relax%

+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\relax\@@ylswtrue\else\@@ylswfalse\fi

+\if@@ylsw

+\ifnum#5<0\relax%

+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%

+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax\fi

+\ifnum\@tmpaa>#3\relax%

+\ifnum\@tmpaa<#4\relax%

+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit

+ \or\ifx\aaa\empty

+      \gdef\@ylii{0}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1

+    \else

+      \gdef\@ylii{30}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylatrue% subst. on 1

+    \fi

+ \or\ifx\bbb\empty

+      \gdef\@ylii{-103}\gdef\@yli{-171}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2

+     \else

+      \gdef\@ylii{-73}\gdef\@yli{-223}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylbtrue% subst. on 2

+     \fi

+ \or \ifx\ccc\empty

+      \gdef\@ylii{-303}\gdef\@yli{-171}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3

+     \else

+      \gdef\@ylii{-333}\gdef\@yli{-223}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylctrue% subst. on 3

+     \fi

+ \or\ifx\ddd\empty

+       \gdef\@ylii{-406}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4

+     \else

+       \gdef\@ylii{-436}\gdef\@yli{0}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yldtrue% subst. on 4

+     \fi

+ \or\ifx\eee\empty

+       \gdef\@ylii{-303}\gdef\@yli{171}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5

+      \else

+       \gdef\@ylii{-333}\gdef\@yli{223}\global\@ylswtrue%\@yletrue% subst. on 5

+      \fi

+ \or \ifx\fff\empty

+      \gdef\@ylii{-103}\gdef\@yli{171}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6

+     \else

+      \gdef\@ylii{-73}\gdef\@yli{223}\global\@ylswtrue%\@ylftrue% subst. on 6

+     \fi

+\fi%end of ifcase

+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}}%

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% The |\@hsubsta| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 

+% the 1-position (top) of a vertical six-membered ring.  The bond linking 

+% between the substituent and the 1-position is drawn in the light of 

+% the corresponding bond modifier (|\@tmpc| = Sa, Sb, SA, SB etc.). 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{Added bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, Sd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hsubsta}

+% *************************************************************

+% * treatment of substitution positions for a horizontal type *

+% *************************************************************

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % subst. on 1 %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\def\@hsubsta{%

+\if@aclip %clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % left type only

+           \put(-30,0){\line(-1,0){110}}%      % single bond at 1

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=27\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=36\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{42}{\@memberb}%     % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-30,18){\line(-5,3){100}}%     % single bond at 1

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-30,-18){\line(-5,-3){100}}%    % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-30,-18)(-120,-72)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-30,-18){\line(-5,-3){100}}%    % single bond at 1

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=27\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=36\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{42}{\@memberb}%     % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-30,18){\line(-5,3){100}}%     % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-30,18)(-130,78)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=27\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=36\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{42}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+           \put(-30,18){\line(-5,3){100}}%     % single bond at 1

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=27\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(-30,-18){\line(-5,-3){100}}%   % single bond at 1

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi

+    \fi\fi

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % left type only

+           \put(-30,-12){\line(-1,0){110}}%    % double bond at 1

+           \put(-30,12){\line(-1,0){110}}%     % double bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % left type only

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-30,0){\line(-1,0){110}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % left type only

+           \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-30,0){\line(-1,0){110}}%      % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-30,0)(-140,0)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(0,0){\setatombondG}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(0,0){\setatombondD}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % left type only

+           \put(-40,0){\line(-1,0){100}}%      % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi

+   \fi\fi%

+\else%% no clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % left type only

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,0){140}}%        % single bond at 1

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{42}{\@memberb}%     % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,3){120}}%        % single bond at 1

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,-3){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(-120,-72)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,-3){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{42}{\@memberb}%     % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,3){120}}%        % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(-120,72)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{42}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,3){120}}%        % single bond at 1

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+           \put(0,0){\line(-5,-3){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi

+    \fi\fi

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%   % left type only

+           \put(0,-12){\line(-1,0){140}}%     % double bond at 1

+           \put(0,12){\line(-1,0){140}}%      % double bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%   % left type only

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%   % left type only

+           \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(-140,0)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(0,0){\setatombondG}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(0,0){\setatombondD}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putlatom{-157}{-31}{\@memberb}%   % left type only

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,0){140}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi

+ \fi}%end of \@hsubsta

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The |\@hsubstb| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 

+% the 2-position (upper-left) of a vertical six-membered ring. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{Added bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, Sd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hsubstb}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % subst. on 2 %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\def\@hsubstb{%

+ \if@bclip %clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=43\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax

+           \putlratom{-27}{331}{\@memberb}%

+           \put(79,221){\line(-3,5){63}}% % single bond at 2 (62=>63)

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=21\relax

+           \putlatom{-41}{240}{\@memberb}%     % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(59,201){\line(-5,3){100}}%     % single bond at 2

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \putratom{83}{331}{\@memberb}%      % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(103,221){\line(0,1){100}}%     % single bond at 2

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(103,221)(103,321)}}%1998/10/11 by SF

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \putratom{83}{331}{\@memberb}%      % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(103,221){\line(0,1){100}}%     % single bond at 2

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=21\relax

+           \putlatom{-41}{240}{\@memberb}%     % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(59,201){\line(-5,3){100}}%     % single bond at 2

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(59,201)(-41,261)}}%1998/10/11 by SF

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=21\relax

+           \putlatom{-41}{240}{\@memberb}%     % left type

+           \put(59,201){\line(-5,3){100}}%     % single bond at 2

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \putratom{83}{331}{\@memberb}%      % right type

+           \put(103,221){\line(0,1){100}}%     % single bond at 2

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=49\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-13\relax

+           \putlratom{-27}{331}{\@memberb}%

+           \put(78,208){\line(-3,5){63}}% % double bond at 2(62->63)

+           \put(100,219){\line(-3,5){63}}% % double bond at 2(62->63)

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=43\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax

+           \putlratom{-27}{331}{\@memberb}%

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(79,221){\line(-3,5){63}}% % single bond at 2 (62->63)

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=43\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax

+           \putlratom{-27}{331}{\@memberb}%

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(79,221){\line(-3,5){63}}% % single bond at 2(62->63)

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(79,221)(16,326)}}%1998/10/11 by SF

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(103,171){\setatombondh}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(103,171){\setatombondF}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=43\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax

+           \putlratom{-27}{331}{\@memberb}%

+           \put(79,221){\line(-3,5){63}}% % single bond at 2 (62->63)

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi

+ \else%%no clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=58\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-41\relax

+           \putlratom{-27}{331}{\@memberb}%

+           \put(103,171){\line(-3,5){72}}%     % single bond at 2

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=14\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-3\relax

+           \putlatom{-31}{240}{\@memberb}%     % left type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(103,171){\line(-5,3){120}}%    % single bond at 2

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax

+           \putratom{83}{331}{\@memberb}%      % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(103,171){\line(0,1){140}}%     % single bond at 2

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(103,171)(103,311)}}%1998/10/11 by SF

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax

+           \putratom{83}{331}{\@memberb}%      % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(103,171){\line(0,1){140}}%     % single bond at 2

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=14\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-3\relax

+           \putlatom{-31}{240}{\@memberb}%     % left type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(103,171){\line(-5,3){120}}%    % single bond at 2

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(103,171)(-7,243)}}%1998/10/11 by SF

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=14\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-3\relax

+           \putlatom{-31}{240}{\@memberb}%     % left type

+           \put(103,171){\line(-5,3){120}}%    % single bond at 2

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax

+           \putratom{83}{331}{\@memberb}%      % right type

+           \put(103,171){\line(0,1){140}}%     % single bond at 2

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=64\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-41\relax

+           \putlratom{-27}{331}{\@memberb}%

+           \put(96,168){\line(-3,5){72}}%      % double bond at 2

+           \put(121,174){\line(-3,5){72}}%     % double bond at 2

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=58\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-41\relax

+           \putlratom{-27}{331}{\@memberb}%

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(103,171){\line(-3,5){72}}%     % single bond at 2

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=58\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-41\relax

+           \putlratom{-27}{331}{\@memberb}%

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(103,171){\line(-3,5){72}}%     % single bond at 2

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(103,171)(31,291)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(103,171){\setatombondh}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(103,171){\setatombondF}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=58\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-41\relax

+           \putlratom{-27}{331}{\@memberb}%

+           \put(103,171){\line(-3,5){72}}%     % single bond at 2

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi

+ \fi}% end of \@hsubstb

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The |\@hsubstc| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 

+% the 3-position (upper-right) of a vertical six-membered ring. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{Added bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, Sd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hsubstc}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % subst. on 3 %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\def\@hsubstc{%

+ \if@cclip %clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=43\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax

+         \putratom{363}{331}{\@memberb}%       

+         \put(343,221){\line(3,5){63}}% % single bond at 3 (62->63)

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=21\relax

+           \putratom{443}{240}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(343,201){\line(5,3){100}}%     % single bond at 3

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=0\relax

+           \putratom{283}{331}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(303,221){\line(0,1){110}}%     % single bond at 3

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(303,221)(303,331)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=0\relax

+           \putratom{283}{331}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(303,221){\line(0,1){110}}%     % single bond at 3

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=21\relax

+           \putratom{443}{240}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(343,201){\line(5,3){100}}%     % single bond at 3

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(343,201)(443,261)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=21\relax

+           \putratom{443}{240}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           \put(343,201){\line(5,3){100}}%     % single bond at 3

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=0\relax

+           \putratom{283}{331}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           \put(303,221){\line(0,1){110}}%     % single bond at 3

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=22\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-18\relax

+           \putratom{363}{331}{\@memberb}%       

+           \put(328,208){\line(3,5){63}}%  % double bond at 3

+           \put(303,214){\line(3,5){63}}%  % double bond at 3

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=43\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax

+           \putratom{363}{331}{\@memberb}%       

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(343,221){\line(3,5){63}}%  % single bond at 3

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=43\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax

+           \putratom{363}{331}{\@memberb}%       

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(343,221){\line(3,5){63}}% % single bond at 3 (62->63)

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(343,221)(406,326)}}% 1998/10/11 by SF

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(303,171){\setatombondD}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(303,171){\setatombondb}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=43\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=5\relax

+           \putratom{363}{331}{\@memberb}%       

+           \put(343,221){\line(3,5){63}}%  % single bond at 3 (62->63)

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi

+ \else%no clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=12\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-40\relax

+           \putratom{363}{331}{\@memberb}%       

+           \put(303,171){\line(3,5){72}}%      % single bond at 3

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=3\relax

+           \putratom{443}{240}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(303,171){\line(5,3){120}}%     % single bond at 3

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax

+           \putratom{283}{331}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(303,171){\line(0,1){140}}%     % single bond at 3

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(303,171)(303,311)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up  --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax

+           \putratom{283}{331}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(303,171){\line(0,1){140}}%     % single bond at 3

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=3\relax

+           \putratom{443}{240}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(303,171){\line(5,3){120}}%     % single bond at 3

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(303,171)(423,243)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=3\relax

+           \putratom{443}{240}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           \put(303,171){\line(5,3){120}}%     % single bond at 3

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-20\relax

+           \putratom{283}{331}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           \put(303,171){\line(0,1){140}}%     % single bond at 3

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi%

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=6\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-40\relax

+           \putratom{363}{331}{\@memberb}%       

+           \put(310,168){\line(3,5){72}}%      % double bond at 3

+           \put(284,174){\line(3,5){72}}%      % double bond at 3

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=12\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-40\relax

+           \putratom{363}{331}{\@memberb}%       

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(303,171){\line(3,5){72}}%      % single bond at 3

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=12\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-40\relax

+           \putratom{363}{331}{\@memberb}%       

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(303,171){\line(3,5){72}}%      % single bond at 3

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(303,171)(375,291)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(303,171){\setatombondD}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(303,171){\setatombondb}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=12\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-40\relax

+           \putratom{363}{331}{\@memberb}%       

+           \put(303,171){\line(3,5){72}}%      % single bond at 3

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi

+ \fi}% end of \@hsubstc

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The |\@hsubstd| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 

+% the 4-position (right-hand) of a vertical six-membered ring. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{Added bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, Sd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@substd}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % subst. on 4 %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\def\@hsubstd{%

+\if@clip %clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only

+            \put(436,0){\line(1,0){110}}%     % single bond at 4

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-27\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=36\relax

+           \putratom{563}{42}{\@memberb}%     % right type only

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(436,18){\line(5,3){100}}%     % single bond at 4

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-27\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=22\relax

+           \putratom{563}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % right type only

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(436,-18){\line(5,-3){100}}%   % single bond at 4

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(436,-18)(526,-72)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-27\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=22\relax

+           \putratom{563}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % right type only

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(436,-18){\line(5,-3){100}}%   % single bond at 4

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-27\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=36\relax

+           \putratom{563}{42}{\@memberb}%     % right type only

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(436,18){\line(5,3){100}}%     % single bond at 4

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(436,18)(536,78)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-27\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=36\relax

+           \putratom{563}{42}{\@memberb}%     % right type only

+           \put(436,18){\line(5,3){100}}%     % single bond at 4

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-27\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=22\relax

+           \putratom{563}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % right type only

+           \put(436,-18){\line(5,-3){100}}%   % single bond at 4

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only

+           \put(436,-12){\line(1,0){110}}%    % double bond at 4

+           \put(436,12){\line(1,0){110}}%     % double bond at 4

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+            \put(436,0){\line(1,0){110}}%     % single bond at 4

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only

+           \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+            \put(436,0){\line(1,0){110}}%     % single bond at 4

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(436,0)(546,0)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(406,0){\setatombondF}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(406,0){\setatombondE}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only

+            \put(436,0){\line(1,0){110}}%     % single bond at 4

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi

+\else%% no clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only

+            \put(406,0){\line(1,0){140}}%     % single bond at 4

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax

+           \putratom{563}{42}{\@memberb}%     % right type only

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(406,0){\line(5,3){120}}%      % single bond at 4

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax

+           \putratom{563}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % right type only

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(406,0){\line(5,-3){120}}%     % single bond at 4

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(406,0)(526,-72)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax

+           \putratom{563}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % right type only

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(406,0){\line(5,-3){120}}%     % single bond at 4

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax

+           \putratom{563}{42}{\@memberb}%     % right type only

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(406,0){\line(5,3){120}}%      % single bond at 4

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(406,0)(526,72)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=30\relax

+           \putratom{563}{42}{\@memberb}%     % right type only

+           \put(406,0){\line(5,3){120}}%      % single bond at 4

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-37\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=28\relax

+           \putratom{563}{-100}{\@memberb}%   % right type only

+           \put(406,0){\line(5,-3){120}}%     % single bond at 4

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only

+           \put(406,-12){\line(1,0){140}}%    % double bond at 4

+           \put(406,12){\line(1,0){140}}%     % double bond at 4

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+            \put(406,0){\line(1,0){140}}%     % single bond at 4

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only

+           \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+            \put(406,0){\line(1,0){140}}%     % single bond at 4

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(406,0)(546,0)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(406,0){\setatombondF}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(406,0){\setatombondE}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=-17\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=31\relax

+           \putratom{563}{-31}{\@memberb}%    % right type only

+            \put(406,0){\line(1,0){140}}%     % single bond at 4

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi

+ \fi}% end of \@hsubstd

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The |\@hsubste| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 

+% the 5-position (lower-right) of a vertical six-membered ring. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{Added bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, Sd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hsubste}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % subst. on 5 %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\def\@hsubste{%

+ \if@eclip %clipping

+  \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=43\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax

+           \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+           \put(343,-221){\line(3,-5){63}}%% single bond at 5 (62=>63)

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=41\relax

+           \putratom{443}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(343,-201){\line(5,-3){100}}%   % single bond at 5

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=71\relax

+           \putratom{283}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(303,-221){\line(0,-1){110}}%   % single bond at 5

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(303,-221)(303,-321)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=71\relax

+           \putratom{283}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(303,-221){\line(0,-1){110}}%   % single bond at 5

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=41\relax

+           \putratom{443}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(343,-201){\line(5,-3){100}}%   % single bond at 5

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(343,-201)(443,-260)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=41\relax

+           \putratom{443}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(343,-201){\line(5,-3){100}}%   % single bond at 5

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=71\relax

+           \putratom{283}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(303,-221){\line(0,-1){110}}%   % single bond at 5

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=22\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=82\relax

+           \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}

+           \put(328,-208){\line(3,-5){63}}% % double bond at 5 (62->63)

+           \put(306,-224){\line(3,-5){63}}% % double bond at 5 (62->63)

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=43\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax

+           \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(343,-221){\line(3,-5){63}}%% single bond at 5(62->63)

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=43\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax

+           \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(343,-221){\line(3,-5){63}}% % single bond at 5 (62->63)

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(343,-221)(406,-326)}}%1998/10/11 by SF

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(303,-171){\setatombondb}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(303,-171){\setatombondG}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=43\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax

+         \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+         \put(343,-221){\line(3,-5){63}}% % single bond at 5(62->63)

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi

+ \else%no clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=9\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=111\relax

+           \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+           \put(303,-171){\line(3,-5){72}}%    % single bond at 5

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax

+           \putratom{443}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(303,-171){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % single bond at 5

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=81\relax

+           \putratom{283}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(303,-171){\line(0,-1){140}}%   % single bond at 5

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(303,-171)(303,-321)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=81\relax

+           \putratom{283}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(303,-171){\line(0,-1){140}}%   % single bond at 5

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax

+           \putratom{443}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(303,-171){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % single bond at 5

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(303,-171)(423,-243)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax

+           \putratom{443}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(303,-171){\line(5,-3){120}}%   % single bond at 5

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=81\relax

+           \putratom{283}{-402}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(303,-171){\line(0,-1){140}}%   % single bond at 5

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=3\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=111\relax

+           \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+            \put(310,-168){\line(3,-5){72}}%   % double bond at 5

+            \put(284,-174){\line(3,-5){72}}%   % double bond at 5

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=9\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=111\relax

+           \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(303,-171){\line(3,-5){72}}%    % single bond at 5

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=9\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=111\relax

+           \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(303,-171){\line(3,-5){72}}%    % single bond at 5

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(303,-171)(375,-291)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(303,-171){\setatombondb}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(303,-171){\setatombondG}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=9\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=111\relax

+           \putratom{363}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+           \put(303,-171){\line(3,-5){72}}%    % single bond at 5

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi

+ \fi}% end of \@hsubste

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The |\@hsubstf| command is used for placing a substituent (|\@memberb|) at 

+% the 6-position (lower-left) of a vertical six-membered ring. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/15}{Added bond modifiers: FA, FB, GA, GB, Su, Sd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hsubstf}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % subst. on 6 %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\def\@hsubstf{%

+ \if@fclip %clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=43\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax

+          \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+          \put(79,-221){\line(-3,-5){63}}% % single bond at 6 (62=>63)

+    \else\if\@tmpc B%(B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=40\relax

+           \putlatom{-31}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(59,-201){\line(-5,-3){100}}%   % single bond at 6

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=81\relax

+           \putratom{83}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(103,-221){\line(0,-1){100}}%   % single bond at 6

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(103,-221)(103,-321)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=81\relax

+           \putratom{83}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(103,-221){\line(0,-1){100}}%   % single bond at 6

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=40\relax

+           \putlatom{-31}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(59,-201){\line(-5,-3){100}}%   % single bond at 6

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(59,-201)(-41,-261)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=40\relax

+           \putlatom{-31}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(59,-201){\line(-5,-3){100}}%   % single bond at 6

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=81\relax

+           \putratom{83}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           \put(103,-221){\line(0,-1){100}}%   % single bond at 6

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi

+    \fi\fi

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=49\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=82\relax

+            \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+           \put(78,-208){\line(-3,-5){63}}% % double bond at 6 (62->63)

+           \put(106,-219){\line(-3,-5){63}}% % double bond at 6 (62->63)

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=43\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax

+            \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(79,-221){\line(-3,-5){63}}% % single bond at 6 (62=>63)

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=43\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax

+            \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(79,-221){\line(-3,-5){63}}% single bond at 6 (62=>63)

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(79,-221)(16,-326)}}%1998/10/11 by SF

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(103,-171){\setatombondE}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusetrue

+      \put(103,-171){\setatombondh}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=43\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=76\relax

+           \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+           \put(79,-221){\line(-3,-5){63}}% % single bond at 6(62->63)

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi

+ \else%%no clipping

+   \if\@tmpb S%single bond

+    \ifx\@tmpc\empty%

+      \yl@xdiff=59\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=111\relax

+            \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+            \put(108,-171){\line(-3,-5){72}}%  % single bond at 6

+%   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+   \else\if\@tmpc B%beta single bond%1998/10/11 by S. Fujita

+      \yl@xdiff=8\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax

+           \putlatom{-31}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(103,-171){\line(-5,-3){120}}%  % single bond at 6

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc A%(A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax

+           \putratom{83}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(103,-171){\line(0,-1){140}}%   % single bond at 6

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(103,-171)(103,-311)}}%1998/10/17 by SF

+   \else\if\@tmpc u%(u) up --- (B) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax

+           \putratom{83}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(103,-171){\line(0,-1){140}}%   % single bond at 6

+           }%

+    \else\if\@tmpc d%(d) down --- (A) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=8\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax

+           \putlatom{-31}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(103,-171){\line(-5,-3){120}}%  % single bond at 6

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(103,-171)(-17,-243)}}%

+    \else\if\@tmpc b%(b) beta

+      \yl@xdiff=8\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=58\relax

+           \putlatom{-31}{-301}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+           \put(103,-171){\line(-5,-3){120}}%  % single bond at 6

+    \else\if\@tmpc a%(a) alpha

+      \yl@xdiff=20\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=91\relax

+           \putratom{83}{-402}{\@memberb}%     % right type

+           \put(103,-171){\line(0,-1){140}}%   % single bond at 6

+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+    \fi\fi

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=65\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=111\relax

+            \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+            \put(96,-168){\line(-3,-5){72}}%   % double bond at 6

+            \put(121,-174){\line(-3,-5){72}}%  % double bond at 6

+   \else\if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=59\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=111\relax

+            \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+            \put(108,-171){\line(-3,-5){72}}%  % single bond at 6

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+            \put(108,-171){\line(-3,-5){72}}%  % single bond at 6

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=59\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=111\relax

+            \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+            \put(108,-171){\line(-3,-5){72}}%  % single bond at 6

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(103,-171)(31,-291)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb F%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(103,-171){\setatombondE}%

+     }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb G%fused bond

+     {\let\@tmpb=\@tmpc\@clipfusefalse

+      \put(103,-171){\setatombondh}%

+     }%

+   \else%

+      \yl@xdiff=59\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=111\relax

+            \putlratom{-27}{-402}{\@memberb}%

+            \put(108,-171){\line(-3,-5){72}}%  % single bond at 6

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi%

+   \fi\fi

+ \fi}% end of \@hsubstf

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Setting-up substituents and bonds on a six-membered ring}

+%

+% The |\setsixringh| macro takes 5 arguments, which have the same meanings 

+% as described in the definition of the |\setsixringv| macro. 

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+% ****************************************************************

+% * setting of atoms and bonds on a horizontal six-membered ring *

+% ****************************************************************

+%

+%    \setsixringh{SUBSLIST}{AD}{LOWER}{UPPER}{ORDER}

+%

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% The first argument |SUBSLIST| is a list of substituents, which is 

+% represented in the standard format of \XyMTeX{}. 

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%     SUBSLIST: list of substituents (max 6 substitution positions)

+%

+%       for n = 1 to 6 

+%

+%           nD         :  exocyclic double bond at n-atom

+%           n or nS    :  exocyclic single bond at n-atom

+%           nA         :  alpha single bond at n-atom

+%           nB         :  beta single bond at n-atom

+%           nSA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (boldface)

+%           nSB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (dotted line)

+%           nSa        :  alpha (not specified) single bond at n-atom

+%           nSb        :  beta (not specified) single bond at n-atom

+%

+%           nSd        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 

+%                           with an alternative direction to nSA 

+%           nSu        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 

+%                           with an alternative direction to nSB 

+%           nFA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 

+%                           for ring fusion 

+%           nFB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 

+%                           for ring fusion 

+%           nGA        :  alpha single bond at n-atom (dotted line) 

+%                           for the other ring fusion 

+%           nGB        :  beta single bond at n-atom (boldface) 

+%                           for the other ring fusion 

+%

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% The second argument |AD| is an adjustment value, which adjusts the original 

+% set of locant numbers into the standard one between 1 to 6 for drawing 

+% a six-membered ring. 

+% The effective range of the standared set of locant numbers is 

+% restricted by the auguments |LOWER| and |UPPER|.  A minus value of 

+% the last argument shows the anti-clockwise numbering, while zero or 

+% a plus value represents the clockwise numbering. 

+%

+% \begin{verbatim}

+%    AD       : adjustment      e.g. 0 for six-membered rings

+%    LOWER    : lower limit     LOWER < effective range < UPPER

+%    UPPER    : upper limit

+%    ORDER     : >= 0 clockwise, <0 anti-clockwise

+%

+% \end{verbatim}

+%

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/11}{Adding switches \cs{@yla} etc.}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Deleting switches \cs{@yla} etc.}
+%

+% \begin{macro}{\setsixringh}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setsixringh#1#2#3#4#5{%

+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%

+\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else

+\ifnum#5 < 0\relax%

+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%

+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax \fi

+\ifnum\@tmpaa >#3\relax%

+\ifnum\@tmpaa <#4\relax%

+\ifcase\@tmpaa%0 omit

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+% The following commands are not used in a revised version

+% because of the direct use of |\ifx\@memberb\@yl\else...\fi|.

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+% %\or \if@yla\else\@hsubsta\fi% subst. on 1

+% %\or \if@ylb\else\@hsubstb\fi% subst. on 2

+% %\or \if@ylc\else\@hsubstc\fi% subst. on 3

+% %\or \if@yld\else\@hsubstd\fi% subst. on 4

+% %\or \if@yle\else\@hsubste\fi% subst. on 5

+% %\or \if@ylf\else\@hsubstf\fi% subst. on 6

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+ \or\@hsubsta% subst. on 1

+ \or\@hsubstb% subst. on 2

+ \or\@hsubstc% subst. on 3

+ \or\@hsubstd% subst. on 4

+ \or\@hsubste% subst. on 5

+ \or\@hsubstf% subst. on 6

+\fi%end of ifcase

+\fi\fi\fi\fi}}% %end of setsixringh

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \section{Mocros linking Substituents}

+% \subsection{Right-handed linking unit}

+%

+% A structure-drawing command can be used to typeset a substituent 

+% by using a (yl)-argument. Moreover, the macro |\ryl| permits us 

+% to draw an intermediate linking unit. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{ryl} etc.}
+%

+% \begin{macro}{\ryl}

+% \begin{macro}{\@ryl}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\newcount\x@ryl

+\newcount\y@ryl

+\def\ryl{\@ifnextchar({\@ryl}{\@ryl()}}

+\def\@ryl(#1)#2{%

+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize

+\@reset@ylsw%

+\def\centeraaa{}%

+\x@ryl=0\y@ryl=0

+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%

+\if@ylsw%

+\XyMTeXWarning{Duplicated items in the first augument of \string\ryl}%

+\else%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%

+\settowidth{\dimen0}{\@memberb}%

+\x@ryl=\dimen0%%%dimension => counter

+\divide\x@ryl\unitlength

+\advance\x@ryl by-70

+\y@ryl=0

+\ifcase\@tmpa%

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+\advance\y@ryl by50

+\or%1

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+\advance\x@ryl by30

+\advance\y@ryl by50

+\or%2

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+\advance\x@ryl by40

+\advance\y@ryl by40

+\or%3

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+\advance\x@ryl by50

+\advance\y@ryl by30

+\or%4

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+\advance\x@ryl by50

+\advance\y@ryl by0

+\or%5

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+\advance\x@ryl by50

+\advance\y@ryl by-30

+\or%6

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+\advance\x@ryl by50

+\advance\y@ryl by-50

+\or%7

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+\advance\x@ryl by30

+\advance\y@ryl by-50

+\or%8

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+\advance\y@ryl by-50

+\fi

+\fi\fi}%

+ \yl@shiftii=\x@ryl

+ \yl@shifti=-\y@ryl

+ \advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff

+ \advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff

+ \begin{picture}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % setting hetero atoms %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\ifx\centeraaa\empty\else%

+   \@clipfusetrue

+   \putlatom{40}{-30}{\centeraaa}%  % left type

+\fi%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % setting substituents %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%

+\ifcase\@tmpa%

+\setatombonda% 0 (upward) (0,1)

+\or\setatombondF%1 (3,5)

+\or\setatombondA%2 (1,1)

+\or\setatombondf%3 (5,3)

+\or\setatombondb%4 (1,0)

+\or\setatombonde%5 (5,-3)

+\or\setatombondB%6 (1,-1)

+\or\setatombondE%7 (3,-5)

+\or\setatombondc%8 (0,-1)

+\fi%end of ifcase

+\fi

+}\end{picture}}%               %end of \ryl macro

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The substituent-setting commands |\setatombondF| etc. are used 

+% in the macro |\ryl|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondF}

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{setatombondF}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setatombondF{%% (3,5)

+  \if@clipfuse%

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(30,50){\line(3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(30,50){\line(3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(30,50)(90,150)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(30,50){\line(3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(30,50){\line(3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(40,44){\line(3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(20,56){\line(3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(45,41){\line(3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(30,50){\line(3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(15,59){\line(3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(30,50){\line(3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putratom{80}{160}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+  \else%no clipping

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(90,150)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(0,0){\line(3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(0,0){\line(3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(10,-6){\line(3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-10,6){\line(3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(15,-9){\line(3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-15,9){\line(3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(0,0){\line(3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putratom{80}{160}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+  \fi%

+}% end of \setatombondF

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondE}

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{setatombondE}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setatombondE{%% (3,-5)

+  \if@clipfuse%

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=70\relax

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(30,-50){\line(3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(30,-50){\line(3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(30,-50)(90,-150)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(30,-50){\line(3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+           \put(30,-50){\line(3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+           \put(40,-44){\line(3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(20,-56){\line(3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond

+           \put(45,-41){\line(3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(30,-50){\line(3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(15,-59){\line(3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+           \put(30,-50){\line(3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putratom{80}{-220}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+  \else%no clipping

+      \yl@xdiff=10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=70\relax

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(90,-150)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond

+           \put(10,6){\line(3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-10,-6){\line(3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond

+           \put(15,9){\line(3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-15,-9){\line(3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putratom{80}{-220}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+  \fi%

+}% end of \setatombondE

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondA}

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{setatombondA}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setatombondA{%% (1,1)

+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=0\relax

+  \if@clipfuse%

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(40,40){\line(1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(40,40){\line(1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(40,40)(140,140)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(40,40){\line(1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+           \put(40,40){\line(1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+           \put(46,36){\line(1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(36,46){\line(1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond

+           \put(50,30){\line(1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(40,40){\line(1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(30,50){\line(1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+           \put(40,40){\line(1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putratom{140}{140}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+  \else%no clipping

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(120,120)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond

+           \put(6,-6){\line(1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-6,6){\line(1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond

+           \put(10,-10){\line(1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-10,10){\line(1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putratom{120}{120}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+  \fi%

+}% end of \setatombondA

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondB}

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{setatombondB}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setatombondB{%% (1,-1)

+  \if@clipfuse%

+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=60\relax

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(40,-40){\line(1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(40,-40){\line(1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(40,-40)(140,-140)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(40,-40){\line(1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+           \put(40,-40){\line(1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+           \put(46,-36){\line(1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(36,-46){\line(1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond

+           \put(50,-30){\line(1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(40,-40){\line(1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(30,-50){\line(1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+           \put(40,-40){\line(1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putratom{140}{-200}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+  \else%no clipping

+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=60\relax

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(120,-120)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond

+           \put(6,6){\line(1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-6,-6){\line(1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond

+           \put(10,10){\line(1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-10,-10){\line(1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putratom{120}{-180}{\@memberb}%    % right type

+  \fi%

+}% end of \setatombondB

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Left-handed linking unit}

+%

+% A structure-drawing command can be used to typeset a substituent 

+% by using a (yl)-argument. Moreover, the macro |\lyl| permits us 

+% to draw an intermediate linking unit. 

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{lyl} etc.}
+% \begin{macro}{\lyl}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\lyl{\@ifnextchar({\@lyl}{\@lyl()}}

+\def\@lyl(#1)#2{%

+\iniatom\iniflag%initialize

+\@reset@ylsw%

+\def\centeraaa{}%

+\x@ryl=0\y@ryl=0

+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%

+\if@ylsw%

+\XyMTeXWarning{Duplicated items in the first augument of \string\ryl}%

+\else%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%

+\settowidth{\dimen0}{\@memberb}%

+\x@ryl=\dimen0%%%dimension => counter

+\divide\x@ryl\unitlength

+\advance\x@ryl by-80

+\y@ryl=0

+\ifcase\@tmpa%

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+%\advance\x@ryl by0

+\advance\y@ryl by50

+\or%1

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+\advance\x@ryl by30

+\advance\y@ryl by50

+\or%2

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+\advance\x@ryl by40

+\advance\y@ryl by40

+\or%3

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+\advance\x@ryl by50

+\advance\y@ryl by30

+\or%4

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+\advance\x@ryl by50

+\advance\y@ryl by0

+\or%5

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+\advance\x@ryl by50

+\advance\y@ryl by-30

+\or%6

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+\advance\x@ryl by50

+\advance\y@ryl by-50

+\or%7

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+\advance\x@ryl by30

+\advance\y@ryl by-50

+\or%8

+\def\centeraaa{\@memberb}\@ylswtrue

+%\advance\x@ryl by0

+\advance\y@ryl by-50

+\fi

+\fi\fi}%

+ \yl@shiftii=-\x@ryl

+ \yl@shifti=-\y@ryl

+ \advance\yl@shiftii\yl@xdiff

+ \advance\yl@shifti\yl@ydiff

+ \begin{picture}(0,0)(-\yl@shiftii,-\yl@shifti)

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % setting hetero atoms %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\ifx\centeraaa\empty\else%

+   \@clipfusetrue

+   \putratom{-40}{-30}{\centeraaa}%  % right type

+\fi%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % setting substituents %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\@forsemicol\member:=#2\do{%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+\expandafter\threech@r\@membera{}{}%

+\ifcase\@tmpa%

+\setatombonda% 0 (upward) (0,1)

+\or\setatombondD%1 (-3,5)

+\or\setatombondH%2 (-1,1)

+\or\setatombondd%3 (-5,3)

+\or\setatombondh%4 (-1,0)

+\or\setatombondg%5 (-5,-3)

+\or\setatombondC%6 (-1,-1)

+\or\setatombondG%7 (-3,-5)

+\or\setatombondc%8 (0,-1)

+\fi%end of ifcase

+\fi

+}\end{picture}}%               %end of \lyl macro

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The substituent-setting commands |\setatombondD| etc. are used 

+% in the macro |\ryl|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondD}

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{setatombondD}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setatombondD{%% (-3,5)

+  \if@clipfuse%

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-30,50){\line(-3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-30,50){\line(-3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-30,50)(-90,150)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(-30,50){\line(-3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(-30,50){\line(-3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(-40,44){\line(-3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-20,56){\line(-3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(-45,41){\line(-3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-30,50){\line(-3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-15,59){\line(-3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(-30,50){\line(-3,5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putlatom{-80}{160}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+  \else%no clipping

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(-90,150)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(0,0){\line(-3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(0,0){\line(-3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(-10,-6){\line(-3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(10,6){\line(-3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(-15,-9){\line(-3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(-3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(15,9){\line(-3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=-10\relax

+           \put(0,0){\line(-3,5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putlatom{-80}{160}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+  \fi%

+}% end of \setatombondD

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondG}

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{setatombondG}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setatombondG{%% (-3,-5)

+  \if@clipfuse%

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=70\relax

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-30,-50){\line(-3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-30,-50){\line(-3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-30,-50)(-90,-150)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(-30,-50){\line(-3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+           \put(-30,-50){\line(-3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+           \put(-40,-44){\line(-3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-20,-56){\line(-3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond

+           \put(-45,-41){\line(-3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-30,-50){\line(-3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-15,-59){\line(-3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+           \put(-30,-50){\line(-3,-5){60}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putlatom{-80}{-220}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+  \else%no clipping

+      \yl@xdiff=-10\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=70\relax

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(-90,-150)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond

+           \put(-10,6){\line(-3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(10,-6){\line(-3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond

+           \put(-15,9){\line(-3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(-3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(15,-9){\line(-3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-3,-5){90}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putlatom{-80}{-220}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+  \fi%

+}% end of \setatombondG

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondH}

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{setatombondH}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setatombondH{%% (-1,1)

+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=0\relax

+  \if@clipfuse%

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-40,40){\line(-1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-40,40){\line(-1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-40,40)(-140,140)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(-40,40){\line(-1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+           \put(-40,40){\line(-1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+           \put(-46,36){\line(-1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-36,46){\line(-1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond

+           \put(-50,30){\line(-1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-40,40){\line(-1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-30,50){\line(-1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+           \put(-40,40){\line(-1,1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putlatom{-140}{140}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+  \else%no clipping

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(-120,120)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond

+           \put(-6,-6){\line(-1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(6,6){\line(-1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond

+           \put(-10,-10){\line(-1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(10,10){\line(-1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putlatom{-120}{120}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+  \fi%

+}% end of \setatombondH

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\setatombondC}

+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/25}{New command: \cs{setatombondC}}
+% \changes{v1.02}{1998/10/31}{Adding \cs{yl@xdiff} and \cs{yl@ydiff}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\setatombondC{%% (-1,-1)

+  \if@clipfuse%

+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=60\relax

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(-40,-40){\line(-1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(-40,-40){\line(-1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(-40,-40)(-140,-140)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(-40,-40){\line(-1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+           \put(-40,-40){\line(-1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%double bond

+           \put(-46,-36){\line(-1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-36,-46){\line(-1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%triple bond

+           \put(-50,-30){\line(-1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-40,-40){\line(-1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(-30,-50){\line(-1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+           \put(-40,-40){\line(-1,-1){100}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putlatom{-140}{-200}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+  \else%no clipping

+      \yl@xdiff=0\relax

+      \yl@ydiff=60\relax

+   \if\@tmpb B%beta single bond

+           {%

+           \thicklines%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }%

+   \else\if\@tmpb A%alpha single bond

+       \@ifundefined{dottedline}{%

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           }{{\thicklines%

+              \dottedline{20}(0,0)(-120,-120)}}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb U%unspecified single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb S%beta single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb D%beta single bond

+           \put(-6,6){\line(-1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(6,-6){\line(-1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\if\@tmpb T%beta single bond

+           \put(-10,10){\line(-1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+           \put(10,-10){\line(-1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \else\ifx\@tmpb\empty%beta single bond

+           \put(0,0){\line(-1,-1){120}}%       % single bond at 1

+   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+           \putlatom{-120}{-180}{\@memberb}%    % left type

+  \fi%

+}% end of \setatombondC

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \section{Minor Linking Units}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\ayl}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\ayl{\@ifnextchar({\@ayl@}{\@ayl@(10,40)}}

+\def\@ayl@(#1,#2)#3{\begingroup\yl@xdiff=0 \yl@ydiff=0%

+\kern#1\unitlength\raise#2\unitlength\hbox to0pt{#3\hss}%

+\endgroup}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\upnobond}

+% \begin{macro}{\downnobond}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\upnobond#1#2{%

+\hbox{\hbox to0.72em{\hss#1\hss}\kern-0.72em\raise2.2ex\hbox{#2}}}

+\def\downnobond#1#2{%

+\hbox{\hbox to0.72em{\hss#1\hss}\kern-0.72em\lower2.2ex\hbox{#2}}}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \section{Spriro-Ring Commands}

+% \subsection{Basic Commands for Six-Membered Rings}

+%

+% For treating spiro-ring fusion, the following basic commands 

+% (|\test@vertix| and |\test@vertix@sixv|) are added at the 

+% time of releasing Version 2.00.  These commands are generally 

+% used for detecting hetero atoms at respective vertices of a 

+% heterocyclic ring. 

+%

+% The command |\test@vertix| is used in |\test@vertix@sixv|. 

+% which is designed to test the existence of a hetero atom 

+% (or an equivalent) at each vertix of a six-membered ring. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\test@vertix}

+% \begin{macro}{\test@vertix@sixv}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{test@vertix} and 

+% \cs{test@vertix@sixv}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\test@vertix#1{%

+   \expandafter\def\csname #1#1#1\endcsname{@}%

+   \if\@tmpb h\relax

+    \expandafter\def\csname #1#1#1\endcsname{@}%

+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax

+   \expandafter\def\csname #1#1#1\endcsname{}%

+   \fi\fi}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+%

+% The command |\test@vertix@sixv| is designed to test 

+% the existence of a hetero atom (or an equivalent) 

+% at each vertix of a six-membered ring.

+%

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\test@vertix@sixv#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{%

+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+\expandafter\twoCH@R\@membera//%

+\ifcase\@tmpa%

+% \changes{v2.00}{1996/11/14}{@ in place of a net value}

+ \or \test@vertix{#2}%

+ \or \test@vertix{#3}%

+ \or \test@vertix{#4}%

+ \or 

+   \if\@tmpb a%

+     \def\iii{@}%

+   \else

+     \test@vertix{#5}%

+   \fi

+ \or \test@vertix{#6}%

+ \or \test@vertix{#7}%

+\fi\fi}}% end of \test@vertix@sixv

+%\def\test@vertix@sixv#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{%

+%\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%

+%\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+%\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%

+%\ifcase\@tmpa%

+%% \changes{v2.00}{1996/11/14}{@ in place of a net value}

+% \or \test@vertix{#2}%

+% \or \test@vertix{#3}%

+% \or \test@vertix{#4}%

+% \or \test@vertix{#5}%

+% \or \test@vertix{#6}%

+% \or \test@vertix{#7}%

+%\fi}}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The command |\set@hetatom@sixv| is to set a spiro group 

+% (stored as |\@memberb|) 

+% at a vertix designated by |\@tmpaa| (or originally by |\@tmpa|). 

+% The atom modifier `s' designates that the spiro group contains 

+% a carbon atom (a vertix) at a spiro position, while `h' 

+% represents the presence of a hetero atom at a spiro position. 

+% The absence of such atom modifiers shows the substitution 

+% of a usual hetero atom.  The command |\set@hetatom@sixv| is 

+% used in such commands as |\sixheterov| and |\sixheterovi| 

+% for treating thier ATOMLISTs, 

+% e.g. |1==N;1s==\sixheterov{}{1==(yl)}|.  

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@hetatom@sixv}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@hetatom@sixv}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@hetatom@sixv#1#2#3#4#5{%

+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%

+\ifnum#5 < 0\relax%

+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%

+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax \fi

+\ifnum\@tmpaa >#3\relax%

+\ifnum\@tmpaa <#4\relax%

+\ifcase\@tmpaa%

+\or%position 1

+  \if\@tmpb h\relax

+     \@acliptrue%

+     \putratom{0}{356}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax

+     \@aclipfalse%

+     \putratom{0}{406}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position

+   \else

+     \@acliptrue%

+     \putratom{-31}{356}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \fi\fi\fi

+\or%position 2

+  \if\@tmpb h\relax

+     \@bcliptrue%

+     \putratom{135}{280}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax

+     \@bclipfalse%

+     \putratom{175}{303}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position

+   \else

+     \@bcliptrue%

+     \putratom{135}{280}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \fi\fi\fi

+\or%position 3

+  \if\@tmpb h\relax

+     \@ccliptrue%

+     \putratom{135}{95}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax

+     \@cclipfalse%

+     \putratom{175}{103}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position

+   \else

+     \@ccliptrue%

+     \putratom{135}{65}{\@memberb}%   % right type

+   \fi\fi\fi

+\or%position 4

+  \if\@tmpb h\relax

+     \@cliptrue%

+     \putratom{0}{50}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax

+     \@clipfalse%

+     \putratom{0}{0}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position

+   \else

+     \@cliptrue%

+     \putratom{-31}{-10}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \fi\fi\fi

+\or%position 5

+  \if\@tmpb h\relax

+     \@ecliptrue%

+     \putlatom{-135}{95}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax

+     \@eclipfalse%

+     \putlatom{-175}{103}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position

+   \else

+     \@ecliptrue%

+     \putlatom{-135}{65}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+   \fi\fi\fi

+\or%position 6

+  \if\@tmpb h\relax

+     \@fcliptrue%

+     \putlatom{-135}{280}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax

+     \@fclipfalse%

+     \putlatom{-175}{303}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position

+   \else

+     \@fcliptrue%

+     \putlatom{-135}{280}{\@memberb}% % left type

+   \fi\fi\fi

+\fi% end of ifcase

+\fi\fi\fi}}% end of the macro \set@hetatom@sixv

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The command |\set@hetatom@sixh| is to set a spiro group 

+% (stored as |\@memberb|) 

+% at a vertix designated by |\@tmpaa| (or originally by |\@tmpa|). 

+% The atom modifier `s' designates that the spiro group contains 

+% a carbon atom (a vertix) at a spiro position, while `h' 

+% represents the presence of a hetero atom at a spiro position. 

+% The absence of such atom modifiers shows the substitution 

+% of a usual hetero atom.  The command |\set@hetatom@sixh| is 

+% used in such commands as |\sixheteroh| and |\sixheterohi| 

+% for treating thier ATOMLISTs, 

+% e.g. |1==N;1s==\sixheteroh{}{1==(yl)}|.  

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@hetatom@sixh}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@hetatom@sixh}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@hetatom@sixh#1#2#3#4#5{%

+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+%\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%

+\expandafter\twoCH@R\@membera//%

+\ifnum#5 < 0\relax%

+\@tmpaa=-\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax%

+\else\@tmpaa=\@tmpa\relax \advance\@tmpaa by#2\relax \fi

+\ifnum\@tmpaa >#3\relax%

+\ifnum\@tmpaa <#4\relax%

+\ifcase\@tmpaa%

+\or%position 1

+  \if\@tmpb h\relax

+     \@acliptrue%

+     \putlatom{60}{0}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax

+     \@aclipfalse%

+     \putlatom{0}{0}{\@memberb}%              % left type

+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position

+   \else

+     \@acliptrue%

+     \putlatom{60}{-36}{\@memberb}%              % left type

+   \fi\fi\fi

+\or%position 2

+  \if\@tmpb h\relax

+     \@bcliptrue%

+     \putlatom{135}{141}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax

+     \@bclipfalse%

+     \putlatom{103}{171}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position

+   \else

+     \@bcliptrue%

+     \putlatom{135}{141}{\@memberb}%   % left type

+   \fi\fi\fi

+\or%position 3

+  \if\@tmpb h\relax

+     \@ccliptrue%

+     \putratom{273}{141}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax

+     \@cclipfalse%

+     \putratom{303}{171}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position

+   \else

+     \@ccliptrue%

+     \putratom{273}{141}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \fi\fi\fi

+\or%position 4

+  \if\@tmpb h\relax

+     \@cliptrue%

+   \putratom{346}{0}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax

+     \@clipfalse%

+   \putratom{406}{0}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position

+   \else

+     \@cliptrue%

+   \putratom{346}{-36}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \fi\fi\fi

+\or%position 5

+  \if\@tmpb h\relax

+     \@ecliptrue%

+     \putratom{283}{-131}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax

+     \@eclipfalse%

+     \putratom{303}{-171}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position

+   \else

+     \@ecliptrue%

+     \putratom{273}{-211}{\@memberb}%  % right type

+   \fi\fi\fi

+\or%position 6

+  \if\@tmpb h\relax

+     \@fcliptrue%

+     \putlatom{125}{-131}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+   \else\if\@tmpb s\relax

+     \@fclipfalse%

+     \putlatom{103}{-171}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+   \else\if\@tmpb a\relax%omit fused position

+   \else

+     \@fcliptrue%

+     \putlatom{135}{-211}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+   \fi\fi\fi

+\fi% end of ifcase

+\fi\fi\fi}}% end of the macro \set@hetatom@sixh

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Basic Commands for Six-Six Rings}

+%

+% The command |\test@vertix@decav| is designed to test 

+% the existence of a hetero atom (or an equivalent) 

+% at each vertix of a six-six fused ring.

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\test@vertix@decav}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\test@vertix@decav#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{%

+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%

+\ifcase\@tmpa%

+ \or\or\or\or\or\or

+ \or \test@vertix{#2}%

+ \or

+   \if\@tmpb a%

+     \def\jjj{@}%

+   \else

+     \test@vertix{#3}%

+   \fi

+ \or \test@vertix{#4}%

+ \or \test@vertix{#5}%

+% \or \test@vertix{#6}%

+% \or \test@vertix{#7}%

+\fi\fi}}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The command |\set@vrtx@fuse| is to set an atom (stored as 

+% |\@memberb|) at one (stored as |\@tmpa|) of the fused vertices 

+% of a six-six ring.  

+% These vertices are incapable of accomodating a spiro group. 

+% On the other hand, the other positions can take spiro groups 

+% (stored as |\@memberb|), which are treated by means of 

+% the command |\set@hetatom@sixv|. 

+% The command |\set@vrtx@fuse| is used in such commands 

+% as |\decaheterov| for treating thier ATOMLISTs, 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@vrtx@fuse}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@vrtx@fuse}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@vrtx@fuse#1{%

+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+\expandafter\twoch@r\@membera{}%

+\ifcase\@tmpa%

+ \or

+ \or

+ \or

+ \or%%%%4

+   \if\@tmpb a%

+     \global\@icliptrue%

+     \putlatom{207}{65}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+   \else\relax

+   \fi

+ \or%5

+ \or%6

+ \or%7

+ \or%

+   \if\@tmpb a%

+     \global\@jcliptrue%

+     \putlatom{207}{280}{\@memberb}% % left type

+   \else\relax

+   \fi

+\or%9 (= 4a)

+     \global\@icliptrue%

+     \putlatom{207}{65}{\@memberb}%  % left type

+\or%10 (= 8a)

+     \global\@jcliptrue%

+     \putlatom{207}{280}{\@memberb}% % left type

+\fi\fi}%

+}% end of the macro \set@vrtx@fuse

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The command |\set@vrtx@fuseh| is to set an atom (stored as 

+% |\@memberb|) at one (stored as |\@tmpa|) of the fused vertices 

+% of a six-six ring.  

+% These vertices are incapable of accomodating a spiro group. 

+% On the other hand, the other positions can take spiro groups 

+% (stored as |\@memberb|), which are treated by means of 

+% the command |\set@hetatom@sixh|. 

+% The command |\set@vrtx@fuseh| is used in such commands 

+% as |\decaheteroh| for treating thier ATOMLISTs, 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@vrtx@fuseh}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@vrtx@fuseh}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@vrtx@fuseh#1{%

+\@forsemicol\member:=#1\do{%

+\ifx\member\empty\else%

+\expandafter\@m@mb@r\member;\relax%

+\expandafter\twoCH@R\@membera//%

+\ifcase\@tmpa%

+ \or

+ \or

+ \or

+ \or%%%%4

+   \if\@tmpb a%

+     \global\@icliptrue%

+     \putratom{273}{-211}{\@memberb}%            % right type

+   \else\relax

+   \fi

+ \or%5

+ \or%6

+ \or%7

+ \or%

+   \if\@tmpb a%

+     \global\@jcliptrue%

+     \putlatom{135}{-211}{\@memberb}%            % left type

+   \else\relax

+   \fi

+\or%9 (= 4a)

+   \ifx\@tmpb\empty

+     \global\@icliptrue%

+     \putratom{273}{-211}{\@memberb}%            % right type

+   \else

+     \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden spiro ring for the 4a position}%

+   \fi

+\or%10 (= 8a)

+   \ifx\@tmpb\empty

+     \global\@jcliptrue%

+     \putlatom{135}{-211}{\@memberb}%            % left type

+   \else

+     \XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden spiro ring for the 8a position}%

+   \fi

+\fi\fi}%

+}% end of the macro \set@vrtx@fuseh

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \section{Ring-fusion Commands for Six-Membered Rings}

+% \subsection{Normal Vertical Type}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@sixv| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\sixheterov| etc., where   

+% the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@sixv|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@sixv}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@sixv}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusionadd@sixv{%

+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%

+        \putratom{-38}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%

+        \putratom{60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%

+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%

+        \putratom{-38}{88}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%

+        \putratom{-90}{253}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%

+        \putratom{-90}{120}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+      \else

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % inner bond fusion %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+        \set@fusion@sixv

+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% 

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The inner command |\set@fusion@sixv| is used for typesetting 

+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 

+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 

+% |\FuseWarning|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@sixv}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@sixv}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@sixv{%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % inner bond fusion %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\if\@@tmpa d\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%         % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d, h, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%

+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D, H, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa e\relax%

+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e, k, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%

+        \putlratom{-171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E, K, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa f\relax%

+        \putlratom{-171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{f, j, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa F\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{406}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{F, J, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa a\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{406}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a, i, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%

+        \putlratom{171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A, I, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%

+        \putlratom{171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b, k, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%

+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B, K, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%

+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c, e, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C, E, or other}%

+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@sixv

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Inverse Vertical Type}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@sixvi| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\sixheterovi| etc., where   

+% the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@sixvi|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@sixvi}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@sixvi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusionadd@sixvi{%

+      \if\@@tmpa 4\relax%

+        \putratom{-38}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%

+        \putratom{60}{253}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%

+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 1\relax%

+        \putratom{-38}{88}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%

+        \putratom{-90}{253}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%

+        \putratom{-90}{120}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+      \else

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % inner bond fusion %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+        \set@fusion@sixvi

+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusionadd@sixvi

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The inner command |\set@fusion@sixvi| is used for typesetting 

+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 

+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 

+% |\FuseWarning|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@sixvi}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@sixvi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@sixvi{%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % inner bond fusion %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+ \if\@@tmpa a\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%

+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%

+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%

+        \putlratom{171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%

+        \putlratom{171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{406}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa d\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{406}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%

+        \putlratom{-171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa e\relax%

+        \putlratom{-171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%

+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa f\relax%

+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{f or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa F\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{F or other}%

+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the marcro \set@fusion@sixvi

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Normal Horizontal Type}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@sixh| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\sixheteroh| etc., where   

+% the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@sixh|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@sixh}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@sixh}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusionadd@sixh{%

+      \if\@@tmpa 4\relax%

+        \putratom{272}{-18}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 1\relax%

+        \putratom{68}{-18}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%

+        \putratom{233}{60}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%

+        \putratom{120}{60}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%

+        \putratom{233}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%

+        \putratom{120}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type

+      \else

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % inner bond fusion %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+        \set@fusion@sixh

+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% 

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The inner command |\set@fusion@sixh| is used for typesetting 

+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 

+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 

+% |\FuseWarning|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@sixh}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@sixh}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@sixh{%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % inner bond fusion %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\if\@@tmpa d\relax%

+        \putlratom{406}{0}{\@@tmpb}%         % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{103}{171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d, h, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%

+        \putlratom{303}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-103}{-171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D, H, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa e\relax%

+        \putlratom{303}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e, k, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%

+        \putlratom{103}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E, K, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa f\relax%

+        \putlratom{103}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{103}{-171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{f, j, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa F\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-103}{171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{F, J, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa a\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-103}{-171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a, i, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%

+        \putlratom{103}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{103}{171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A, I, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%

+        \putlratom{103}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b, k, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%

+        \putlratom{303}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B, K, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%

+        \putlratom{303}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-103}{171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c, e, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%

+        \putlratom{406}{0}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused

+%        \FuseWarning{103}{171}%

+        \FuseWarning{103}{-171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C, E, or other}%

+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@sixh

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Inverse Horizontal Type}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@sixhi| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\sixheterohi| etc., where   

+% the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@sixhi|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@sixhi}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/29}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@sixhi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusionadd@sixhi{%

+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%

+        \putratom{272}{-18}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%

+        \putratom{68}{-18}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%

+        \putratom{233}{60}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%

+        \putratom{120}{60}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 6\relax%

+        \putratom{233}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%

+        \putratom{120}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+      \else

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % inner bond fusion %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+        \set@fusion@sixhi

+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% 

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The inner command |\set@fusion@sixhi| is used for typesetting 

+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 

+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 

+% |\FuseWarning|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@sixhi}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@sixhi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@sixhi{%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % inner bond fusion %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\if\@@tmpa F\relax%

+        \putlratom{406}{0}{\@@tmpb}%         % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{103}{171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{F, J, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa f\relax%

+        \putlratom{303}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-103}{-171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{f, j, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%

+        \putlratom{303}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E, K, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa e\relax%

+        \putlratom{103}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e, k, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%

+        \putlratom{103}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{103}{-171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D, H, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa d\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-103}{171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d, h, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-103}{-171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{C, E, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax%

+        \putlratom{103}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{103}{171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{c, e, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%

+        \putlratom{103}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B, K, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%

+        \putlratom{303}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b, k, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%

+        \putlratom{303}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-103}{171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A, I, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa a\relax%

+        \putlratom{406}{0}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{103}{-171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a, i, or other}%

+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@sixhi

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \section{Ring-fusion Commands for Six-Six Fused Rings}

+% \subsection{Conventions for Warning}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\UnfavorableFusion}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/23}{New command: \cs{UnfavorableFusion}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\UnfavorableFusion#1{\if@smallringsw\else

+\XyMTeXWarning{Unfavorable Fusion for bond `#1'}\fi}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\ForbiddenFusion}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/23}{New command: \cs{ForbiddenFusion}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\ForbiddenFusion#1{\if@smallringsw\else

+\XyMTeXWarning{Forbidden Fusion for bond `#1'}\fi}

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Normal Vertical Type}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusion@decav| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\decalinev| and |\decaheterov|, where   

+% the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixv|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@decav}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@decav}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@decav{%

+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb

+  \if\@tmpa a%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa A%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa b%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa B%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa c%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa C%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa d%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa D%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa e%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{e}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa E%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{E}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa f%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa F%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa g%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa G%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa h%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa H%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa i%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{i}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa I%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{I}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa j%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{j}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa J%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{J}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa k%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{k}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa K%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{K}%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@decav

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Vertical-Bottom  Type}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusion@decavb| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\decalinevb| and |\decaheterovb| etc., 

+% where  the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixv|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@decavb}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@decavb}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@decavb{%

+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb

+  \if\@tmpa a%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{b}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa A%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{B}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa b%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa B%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa c%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa C%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa d%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa D%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa e%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%

+      \put(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{e}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa E%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%

+      \put(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{E}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa f%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa F%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa g%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa G%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa h%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%

+      \put(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa H%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%

+      \put(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa i%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{b}%

+      \put(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{i}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa I%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{B}%

+      \put(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{I}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa j%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{j}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa J%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{J}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa k%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%

+      \put(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{k}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa K%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%

+      \put(-171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{K}%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@decavb

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Vertical-Top  Type}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusion@decavt| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\decalinevt| and |\decaheterovt| etc., 

+% where  the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixv|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@decavt}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/25}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@decavt}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@decavt{%

+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb

+  \if\@tmpa a%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa A%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa b%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%

+      \put(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa B%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%

+      \put(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa c%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{b}%

+      \put(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa C%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{B}%

+      \put(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa d%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%

+      \put(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa D%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%

+      \put(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa e%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{b}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{e}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa E%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{B}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{E}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa f%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa F%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa g%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa G%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa h%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa H%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa i%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{i}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa I%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{I}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa j%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{j}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa J%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{J}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa k%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%

+      \put(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{k}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa K%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%

+      \put(171,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{K}%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of \set@fusion@decavt

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Normal Horizontal Type}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusion@decah| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\decalineh| and |\decaheteroh|, where   

+% the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixh|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@decah}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/15}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@decah}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@decah{%

+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb

+  \if\@tmpa a%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa A%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa b%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa B%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa c%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa C%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa d%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa D%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa e%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{e}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa E%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{E}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa f%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa F%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa g%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa G%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa h%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa H%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa i%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{i}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa I%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{I}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa j%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{j}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa J%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{J}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa k%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{k}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa K%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{K}%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@decah

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \section{Ring-fusion Commands for Six-Six-Six Fused Rings}

+% \subsection{Normal Vertical Type of Anthracenes}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusion@hanthrav| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\hanthracenev|, where   

+% the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixv|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@hanthrav}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@hanthrav}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@hanthrav{%

+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb

+  \if\@tmpa a%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa A%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa b%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa B%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa c%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa C%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa d%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa D%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa e%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{e}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa E%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{E}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa f%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{f}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa F%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{F}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa g%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{g}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa G%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{G}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa h%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa H%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa i%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa I%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa j%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa J%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa k%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{k}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa K%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{K}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa l%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{l}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa L%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{L}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa m%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{m}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa M%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{M}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa n%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{n}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa N%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{N}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa o%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{o}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa O%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(684,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{O}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa p%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{p}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa P%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{P}%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@hanthrav

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Normal Vertical Type of Phenanthrenes}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusion@hphenanv| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\hphenanthrenev|, where   

+% the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixv|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@hphenanv}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@phenanv}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@hphenanv{%

+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb

+  \if\@tmpa a%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{b}%

+      \put(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa A%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{B}%

+      \put(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa b%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%

+      \put(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa B%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%

+      \put(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa c%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa C%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa d%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa D%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa e%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{e}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa E%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{E}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa f%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{f}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa F%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{F}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa g%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa G%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa h%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa H%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa i%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa I%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa j%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{j}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa J%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{J}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa k%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{k}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa K%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{K}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa l%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa L%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa m%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{b}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{m}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa M%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{B}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{M}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa n%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%

+      \put(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{n}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa N%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%

+      \put(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{N}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa o%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%

+      \put(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{o}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa O%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%

+      \put(513,303){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{O}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa p%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{p}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa P%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{P}%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@hphananv

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \section{Ring-fusion Commands for Five-Membered Rings}

+% \subsection{Normal vertical type}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@fivev| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\fiveheterov| etc., where   

+% the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@fivev|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@fivev}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/4}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@fivev}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusionadd@fivev{%

+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%

+        \putratom{-38}{88}{\@@tmpb}%        % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%

+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%        % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%

+        \putratom{60}{233}{\@@tmpb}%        % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%

+        \putratom{-60}{233}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%

+        \putratom{-60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 0\relax%

+        \putratom{-38}{150}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % inner bond fusion %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+        \set@fusion@fivev

+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusionadd@fivev

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The inner command |\set@fusion@fivev| is used for typesetting 

+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 

+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 

+% |\FuseWarning|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@fivev}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/4}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@fivev}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@fivev{%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % inner bond fusion %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+ \if\@@tmpa a\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%

+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%

+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%

+        \putlratom{171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax

+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%

+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa d\relax%

+        \putlratom{-171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%

+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa e\relax%

+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E}%

+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the marcro \set@fusion@fivev

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Inverse vertical type}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@fivevi| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\fiveheterov| etc., where   

+% the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@fivevi|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@fivevi}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/4}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@fivevi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusionadd@fivevi{%

+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%

+        \putratom{-38}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%

+        \putratom{60}{233}{\@@tmpb}%        % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%

+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%        % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%

+        \putratom{-60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%

+        \putratom{-60}{233}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 0\relax%

+        \putratom{-38}{213}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % inner bond fusion %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+        \set@fusion@fivevi

+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusionadd@fivevi

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The inner command |\set@fusion@fivevi| is used for typesetting 

+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 

+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 

+% |\FuseWarning|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@fivevi}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/4}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@fivevi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@fivevi{%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % inner bond fusion %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\if\@@tmpa d\relax%

+        \putlratom{-171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d, k, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%

+        \putlratom{-171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D, K, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa e\relax%

+        \putlratom{-171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-171}{-103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e, j, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{406}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{171}{103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E, J, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa a\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{406}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-171}{103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a, i, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%

+        \putlratom{171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{171}{-103}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A, I, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%

+        \putlratom{171}{303}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{0}{200}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b, k, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%

+        \putlratom{171}{103}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{0}{-200}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B, K, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax

+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%

+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%

+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@fivevi

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Normal horizontal type}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@fiveh| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\fiveheteroh| etc., where   

+% the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@fiveh|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@fiveh}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/29}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@fiveh}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusionadd@fiveh{%

+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%

+        \putratom{272}{-18}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%

+        \putratom{233}{60}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%

+        \putratom{120}{60}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%

+        \putratom{233}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%

+        \putratom{120}{-110}{\@@tmpb}%     % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 0\relax%

+        \putratom{196}{-30}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+      \else

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % inner bond fusion %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+        \set@fusion@fiveh

+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% 

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The inner command |\set@fusion@fiveh| is used for typesetting 

+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 

+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 

+% |\FuseWarning|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@fiveh}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@fiveh}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@fiveh{%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % inner bond fusion %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\if\@@tmpa E\relax%

+        \putlratom{406}{0}{\@@tmpb}%         % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{103}{171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E, J, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa e\relax%

+        \putlratom{303}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-103}{-171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e, j, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%

+        \putlratom{303}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D, K, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa d\relax%

+        \putlratom{103}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d, k, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax

+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%

+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%

+        \putlratom{103}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B, K, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%

+        \putlratom{303}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b, k, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%

+        \putlratom{303}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-103}{171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A, I, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa a\relax%

+        \putlratom{406}{0}{\@@tmpb}%      % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{103}{-171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a, i, or other}%

+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@fiveh

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Inverse horizontal type}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusionadd@fivehi| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\fiveheterohi| etc., where   

+% the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusion@fivehi|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusionadd@fivehi}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@fusionadd@fivehi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusionadd@fivehi{%

+      \if\@@tmpa 1\relax%

+        \putratom{-38}{282}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 2\relax%

+        \putratom{60}{233}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 3\relax%

+        \putratom{60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%       % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 4\relax%

+        \putratom{-60}{120}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 5\relax%

+        \putratom{-60}{233}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+      \else\if\@@tmpa 0\relax%

+        \putratom{140}{-30}{\@@tmpb}%      % right type

+      \else

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % inner bond fusion %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+        \set@fusion@fivehi

+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% 

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% The inner command |\set@fusion@fivehi| is used for typesetting 

+% a fused ring at each bond represented by |\@@tmpa|.  Warnings 

+% concerning mismatched ring-fusions are based on the command 

+% |\FuseWarning|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@fivehi}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/11/23}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@fivehi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@fivehi{%

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+% % inner bond fusion %

+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+\if\@@tmpa d\relax%

+        \putlratom{303}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{d, k, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa D\relax%

+        \putlratom{103}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{D, K, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa e\relax%

+        \putlratom{103}{-171}{\@@tmpb}%     % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{103}{-171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{e, j, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa E\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-103}{171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{E, J, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa a\relax%

+        \putlratom{0}{0}{\@@tmpb}%       % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-103}{-171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{a, i, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa A\relax%

+        \putlratom{103}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{103}{171}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{A, I, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa b\relax%

+        \putlratom{103}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{-200}{0}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{b, k, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa B\relax%

+        \putlratom{303}{171}{\@@tmpb}%    % bond fused

+        \FuseWarning{200}{0}%

+          {\fuseAx}{\fuseAy}{\fuseBx}{\fuseBy}{B, K, or other}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa c\relax

+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%

+      \else\if\@@tmpa C\relax%

+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%

+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@sixh

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \section{Ring-fusion Commands for Six-Five-fused Rings}

+% \subsection{Normal vertical type}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusion@nonav| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\indanev| and |\nonaheterov|, where   

+% the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixvi|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@nonav}

+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@nonav{%

+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb

+  \if\@tmpa a%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa A%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa b%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa B%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa c\relax

+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa C\relax%

+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa d%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa D%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa e%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa E%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa f%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa F%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa g%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa G%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa h%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{h}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa H%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{H}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa i%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{i}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa I%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{I}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa j%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{j}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa J%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixvi}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{J}%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@nonav

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Inverse vertical type}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusion@nonavi| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\indanevi| and |\nonaheterovi|, where   

+% the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixv|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@nonavi}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@nonavi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@nonavi{%

+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb

+  \if\@tmpa a%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa A%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa b%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa B%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa c\relax

+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa C\relax%

+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa d%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa D%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa e%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa E%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa f%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa F%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa g%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa G%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa h%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{h}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa H%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{H}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa i%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{i}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa I%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{I}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa j%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{j}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa J%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(342,0){\set@fusionadd@sixv}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{J}%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@nonavi

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Normal horizontal type}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusion@nonah| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\nonaheteroh|, where   

+% the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixhi|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@nonah}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/6}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@nonah}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@nonah{%

+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb

+  \if\@tmpa a%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa A%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa b%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa B%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa c\relax

+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa C\relax%

+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa d%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa D%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa e%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa E%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa f%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa F%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa g%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa G%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa h%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{h}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa H%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{H}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa i%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{i}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa I%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{I}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa j%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{j}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa J%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixhi}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{J}%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@nonah

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \subsection{Inverse horizontal type}

+%

+% The macro |\set@fusion@nonahi| is an inner command contained 

+% in the definition of |\indanehi| and |\nonaheterohi|, where   

+% the macro is used for setting an additive 

+% or a fused ring at each bond (designated by |\@@tmpa|).  The 

+% fused ring is typeset by the inner command |\set@fusionadd@sixh|. 

+%

+% \begin{macro}{\set@fusion@nonahi}

+% \changes{v2.00}{1998/12/5}{New command: \cs{set@fusion@nonahi}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}

+\def\set@fusion@nonahi{%

+  \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+  \let\@@tmpb=\@tmpb

+  \if\@tmpa a%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa A%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa b%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa B%

+      \let\@@tmpa=\@tmpa

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa c\relax

+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `c'}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa C\relax%

+        \XyMTeXWarning{Not-used fusion at bond `C'}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa d%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{c}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{d}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa D%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{C}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{D}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa e%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{d}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa E%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{D}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa f%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa F%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa g%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa G%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa h%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{a}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{h}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa H%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{A}%

+      \put(0,-342){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{H}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa i%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{f}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{i}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa I%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{F}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \UnfavorableFusion{I}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa j%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{e}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{j}%

+  \else\if\@tmpa J%

+      \edef\@@tmpa{E}%

+      \put(0,0){\set@fusionadd@sixh}%

+      \ForbiddenFusion{J}%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%

+}% end of the macro \set@fusion@nonahi

+%</chemstr>

+%    \end{macrocode}

+% \end{macro}

+%

+% \Finale

+%

+\endinput

+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/hetarom.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/hetarom.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..75c408ae768
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/hetarom.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+\def\batchfile{hetarom.ins}

+\input docstrip.tex

+\preamble

+

+This is a generated file.

+

+Copyright 1996, 1998, 2000 by Shinsaku Fujita

+

+This file is part of the XyMTeX system.

+=======================================

+

+Version 1.01 Released on August 16, 1996 

+Version 1.02 Released on October 31, 1998 (private version)

+Version 2.00 Released on December 25, 1998

+Version 2.00a Released on November 11, 2000

+

+Copyright (C) 1996,1998,2000 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.

+This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas 

+This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which 

+is an input directory for TeX. 

+

+Copying of this file is authorized only if either

+

+ (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name and 

+     directory name 

+ (2) if you do make changes, 

+     (a) you name it something other than the names included in the 

+         ``xymtex'' directory and 

+     (b) you acknowledge the original name. 

+ This restriction ensures that all standard styles are identical.

+

+=======================================

+

+This file contains several codes modified from latex.tex (LaTeX2.09) 

+and from latex.ltx (a LaTeX2e), the reused parts of which are subject to 

+Copyright 1994 the LaTeX3 project and the individual authors (For further 

+copyright information see the file legal.txt of the LaTeX2e standard 

+distribution, and any other copyright indicated in this file.)

+

+\endpreamble

+

+\keepsilent

+

+\generateFile{hetarom.drv}{t}{%

+  \from{hetarom.dtx}{driver}}

+

+\generateFile{hetarom.sty}{t}{%

+  \from{hetarom.dtx}{hetarom}}

+

+\endinput

+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/polymers.drv b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/polymers.drv
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..90b85d949e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/xymtex/polymers.drv
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `polymers.drv',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% polymers.dtx  (with options: `driver')
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright 1996,1998 by Shinsaku Fujita
+%% 
+%% This file is part of the XyMTeX system.
+%% =======================================
+%% 
+%% Version 1.01 Released on August 16, 1996
+%% Version 1.02 Released on October 31, 1996 (private version)
+%% Version 2.00 Released on December 25, 1998
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 1998 by Shinsaku Fujita, all rights reserved.
+%% This style file is created for drawing chemical structural formulas
+%% This style file is to be contained in the ``xymtex'' directory which
+%% is an input directory for TeX.
+%% 
+%% Copying of this file is authorized only if either
+%% 
+%%  (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name and
+%%      directory name
+%%  (2) if you do make changes,
+%%      (a) you name it something other than the names included in the
+%%          ``xymtex'' directory and
+%%      (b) you acknowledge the original name.
+%%  This restriction ensures that all standard styles are identical.
+%% 
+%% =======================================
+%% 
+%% This file contains several codes modified from latex.tex (LaTeX2.09)
+%% and from latex.ltx (a LaTeX2e), the reused parts of which are subject to
+%% Copyright 1994 the LaTeX3 project and the individual authors (For further
+%% copyright information see the file legal.txt of the LaTeX2e standard
+%% distribution, and any other copyright indicated in this file.)
+%% 
+%% File: polymers.dtx
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{pLaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesFile{polymers.dtx}[1998/12/25 v2.00 XyMTeX{} package file]
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{polymers.dtx}
+\def\UPSILON{\char'7}
+\def\XyM{X\kern-.30em\smash{%
+\raise.50ex\hbox{\UPSILON}}\kern-.30em{M}}
+\def\XyMTeX{\XyM\kern-.1em\TeX}
+\title{Polymers by {\sffamily polymers.sty}
+(\fileversion) of \XyMTeX{}}
+\author{Shinsaku Fujita \\
+Department of Chemistry and Materials Technology, \\
+Kyoto Institute of Technology, \\
+Matsugasaki, Sakyoku, Kyoto, 606 Japan
+}
+\date{\filedate}
+\begin{document}
+   \maketitle
+   \DocInput{polymers.dtx}
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `polymers.drv'.